[PI00100(ALL)06/95]
thirty-four pica
chart:0040298-B
File:01vxpin.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:15:21 1996
*
[PI00500(ALL)03/95]
thirty-six pica
chart:0040299-B
File:01vxpin.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:15:21 1996
*
[PI00560(ALL)05/95]
Table of Contents
Introductory Information ............... 1
Safety Restraints ................... 9
Starting Your Villager .................57
Warning Lights and Gauges ..............67
Instrument Panel Controls ............... 89
Steering Column Controls .............. 123
Features ...................... 135
Adjustable Rear Seating ............... 175
Electronic Sound Systems .............. 205
Driving Your Villager ................ 229
Roadside Emergencies ................ 255
Customer Assistance ................ 275
Reporting Safety Defects ............. 281
Accessories ..................... 287
Servicing Your Villager ............... 295
Quick Index .................... 375
Index........................ 385
Service Station Information ............. 404
File:01vxpin.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:15:21 1996
1
Introductory Information
[IN00900(ALL)04/94] Using This Guide
[IN01200(ALL)05/95]
To fully appreciate all of the features and options of your new
vehicle, we recommend that you thoroughly read through this
guide now and refer back to it when you have specific needs or
questions. For your own safety and the safety of your
passengers, it is important that you completely understand all
performance and care procedures before operating this vehicle.
For example, without reading further, would you know:
[IN01300(ALL)02/95]
■ What to do if you get a flat tire? (Refer to Flat tire in the
Index)
[IN01400(ALL)02/95]
■ What it means if the O/D OFF light is illuminated on your
instrument panel? (Refer to Overdrive in the Index)
[IN01500(ALL)01/93]
■ How to engage the childproof safety lock on the sliding
door? (Refer to Childproof lock in the Index)
[IN01600(ALL)07/95]
■ That your automatic transaxle will not shift out of PARK (P)
until you depress the brake pedal? (Refer to Gearshift in the
Index)
*
[IN01605(ALL)04/95] Ford’s Commitment to You
*
[IN01610(ALL)10/95]
At Ford Motor Company, excellence is the continuous
commitment to achieve the best result possible. It is dedication
to learning what you want, determination to develop the right
concept, and execution of that concept with care, precision, and
attention to detail. In short, excellence means being the standard
by which others are judged.
*
[IN01615(ALL)04/95]
Our Guiding Principles
*
[IN01620(ALL)04/95]
■ Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, the quality of our
products and services must be our number one priority.
*
[IN01625(ALL)04/95]
■ You are the focus of everything we do. Our work must be
done with you in mind, providing better products and
services than our competition.
File:02vxinn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:15:32 1996
2
*
[IN01630(ALL)04/95]
■ Continuous improvement is essential to our success. We
must strive for excellence in everything we do: in our
products — in their safety and value — and in our services,
our human relations, our competitiveness, and our
profitability.
*
[IN01635(ALL)04/95]
■ Employee involvement is our way of life. We are a team.
We must treat one another with trust and respect.
*
[IN01640(ALL)04/95]
■ Dealers and suppliers are our partners. We must maintain
mutually beneficial relationships with dealers, suppliers, and
our other business associates.
*
[IN01645(ALL)04/95]
■ Integrity is never compromised. Our conduct worldwide
must be pursued in a manner that is socially responsible and
commands respect for its integrity and for its positive
contributions to society.
*
[IN01650(ALL)08/95] Things to Know About Using This Guide
*
[IN01655(ALL)08/95]
Congratulations on the purchase of your new vehicle. This
guide has information about the equipment and the options for
your new vehicle. You may not have bought all of the options
available to you. If you do not know which information applies
to your vehicle, talk to your dealer.
*
[IN01660(ALL)08/95]
This guide describes equipment and gives specifications for
equipment that was in effect when this guide was approved for
printing. Ford may discontinue models or change specifications
or design without any notice and without incurring obligation.
*
[IN01665(ALL)07/95]
NOTES and WARNINGS
*
[IN01666(ALL)05/95]
NOTES give you additional information about the subject
matter you are referencing.
*
[IN01667(ALL)05/95]
WARNINGS remind you to be especially careful in those areas
where carelessness can cause damage to your vehicle or
personal injury to yourself, your passengers or other people.
Please read all WARNINGS carefully.
File:02vxinn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:15:32 1996
Introductory Information
3
*
[IN01668(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
*
[IN01670(ALL)08/95]
Finding Information in This Guide
*
[IN01675(ALL)08/95]
After you have read this guide once, you will probably return
to it when you have a specific question or need additional
information. To help you find specific information quickly, you
can use the Quick Index, Table of Contents, or the Index.
*
[IN01680(ALL)08/95]
The Quick Index at the end of the book provides a page
number following each item which indicates where detailed
information can be found.
*
[IN01685(ALL)08/95]
To use the Index, turn to the back of the book and search in the
alphabetical listing for the word that best describes the
information you need. If the word you chose is not listed, think
of other related words and look them up. We have designed the
Index so that you can find information under a technical term.
%
*
[IN01687(ALL)08/95]
Canadian Owners — French Version
*
[IN01689(ALL)08/95]
French Owner Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by
writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service
Publications, P.O. Box 1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y
4G3.
[IN02700(ALL)01/93] Maintenance Schedule
[IN02800(ALL)04/94]
As with any other member of your family, your new vehicle
requires routine care and regular check-ups. A separate
Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet is included to help you
keep track of all services performed and summarizes the
day-to-day services that are most important for keeping your
vehicle in good condition.
File:02vxinn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:15:32 1996
4
[IN02900(ALL)01/93] Warranties
*
[IN03000(ALL)04/95]
Your vehicle is covered by three types of warranties: Basic
Vehicle Warranty, Extended Warranties on certain parts, and
Emissions Warranties.
%
*
[IN03400(ALL)03/95]
Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefully to find out
about your vehicle’s warranties and your basic rights and
responsibilities.
*
[IN03600(ALL)03/95]
If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, you can get a new
one free of charge. Contact any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer,
or refer to the addresses and phone numbers on the first page
of this owner guide.
[IN04300(ALL)01/93] Ford’s Extended Service Plan (ESPH)
[IN04400(ALL)05/96]
More Protection for Your Vehicle
[IN04425(ALL)05/96]
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing a Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP). Ford ESP
is the only extended service program with the Ford name on it
and the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company.
[IN04450(ALL)05/96]
Ford ESP is an optional service contract, backed and
administered by Ford. It provides:
[IN04475(ALL)05/96]
■ protection against repair costs after your Bumper to Bumper
Warranty expires;
[IN04500(ALL)05/96]
and
[IN04525(ALL)05/96]
■ other benefits during the warranty period (such as:
reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain maintenance
and wear items).
[IN04550(ALL)05/96]
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford Motor
Company dealer. There are several Ford ESP plans available in
various time-and-mileage combinations. Each plan can be
tailored to fit your own driving needs, including reimbursement
benefits for towing and rental. (In Hawaii, rules vary. See your
dealer for details.)
File:02vxinn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:15:32 1996
Introductory Information
5
[IN04575(ALL)05/96]
When you purchase Ford ESP, you receive peace-of-mind
protection throughout the United States and Canada, provided
by a network of more than 5,100 participating Ford Motor
Company dealers.
[IN04600(ALL)05/96]
NOTE: Repairs performed outside the United States and
Canada are not eligible for ESP coverage.
[IN04700(ALL)05/96]
This information is subject to change. Ask your dealer for
complete details about Ford ESP coverage.
[IN05500(ALL)01/93] Break-In Period for Your Villager
[IN05600(ALL)02/95]
Your new vehicle will go through an adjustment or break-in
period during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving. During
the break-in period, you need to pay careful attention to how
you drive your vehicle.
[IN05700(ALL)01/93]
■ Change your speed often as you drive. Do not drive at one
speed for a long time.
%
*
[IN05800(ALL)01/95]
■ Use only the type of engine oil that Ford recommends. See
Engine oil recommendations in the Index. Do not use special
“break-in” oils.
%
*
[IN05900(ALL)01/95]
■ Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehicle has new brake
linings, you should take these steps:
*
[IN06000(ALL)01/95]
— Watch traffic carefully so that you can anticipate when to stop.
*
[IN06100(ALL)01/95]
— Begin braking well in advance.
*
[IN06200(ALL)01/95]
— Apply the brakes gradually.
[IN06300(ALL)05/93]
The break-in period for new brake linings lasts for 100 miles
(160 km) of city driving or 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of highway
driving.
File:02vxinn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:15:32 1996
6
[IN07100(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Outside of Your Villager
%
*
[IN07200(ALL)04/95]
Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle
*
[IN07300(ALL)04/95]
Wash the outside of your vehicle, including the underside, with
a mild detergent.
*
[IN07400(ALL)06/95]
DO NOT:
*
[IN07500(ALL)04/95]
■ Wash your vehicle with hot water
*
[IN07600(ALL)04/95]
■ Wash your vehicle while it sits in direct sunlight
*
[IN07700(ALL)04/95]
■ Wash your vehicle while the body is hot
*
[IN07800(ALL)07/95]
Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damage the paint,
especially in hot weather. Wash your vehicle as often as
necessary to keep it clean.
*
[IN07900(ALL)07/95]
Take similar precautions if your vehicle is exposed to chemical
industrial fallout.
*
[IN08000(ALL)08/95]
Paint damage resulting from fallout is not related to a defect in
paint materials or workmanship and therefore, is not covered by
warranty. Ford, however, believes that continual improvement
in customer satisfaction is a high priority. For this reason, Ford
has authorized their dealers to repair, at no charge to the
owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by environmental
fallout within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) of
purchase, whichever comes first. Customers may be required to
bring their vehicle in for inspection by a Ford representative.
*
[IN08100(ALL)04/95]
Polish your vehicle to remove harmful deposits and protect the
finish.
File:02vxinn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:15:32 1996
Introductory Information
7
%
*
[IN08200(ALL)04/95]
Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts
*
[IN08300(ALL)04/95]
Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a mild detergent. Do
not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, fuel or strong detergents.
%
*
[IN08400(ALL)04/95]
Cleaning Plastic Parts
*
[IN08500(ALL)04/95]
Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts are plastic. Clean with
a tar and road oil remover if necessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for
routine cleaning.
*
[IN08600(ALL)04/95]
Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solvents or
petroleum-based cleaners.
%
*
[IN08700(ALL)04/95]
If you have your vehicle rustproofed, remove oversprayed
rustproofing with a tar and road oil remover. If rustproofing is
not removed from plastic and rubber parts, it can cause
deterioration.
File:02vxinn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:15:32 1996
9
Safety Restraints
%
*
[SR00600(ALL)04/95] Important Safety Belt Information
*
[SR00700(ALL)03/95]
The use of safety belts helps to restrain you and your
passengers in case of a collision. In most states and in Canada
the law requires their use.
*
[SR00800(ALL)08/95]
Safety belts provide best restraint when:
*
[SR00900(ALL)08/95]
■ the seatback is upright
*
[SR01000(ALL)08/95]
■ the occupant is sitting upright (not slouched)
*
[SR01100(ALL)08/95]
■ the lap belt is snug and low on the hips
*
[SR01200(ALL)08/95]
■ the shoulder belt is snug against the chest
*
[SR01300(ALL)08/95]
■ the knees are straight forward
*
[SR01400(ALL)07/95]
To help you remember to fasten your safety belt, a warning
light may come on and a chime may sound. See Safety Belt
Warning Light and Chime in the Warning Lights and Gauges
chapter.
*
[SR01900(ALL)07/95]
See the following sections in this chapter for directions on how
to properly use these safety belts. Also see Safety Restraints for
Children in this chapter for special instructions about using
safety belts for children.
%
*
[SR02000(ALL)05/95]
R WARNING
Make sure that you and your passengers wear safety
belts. Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
10
*
[SR02050(ALL)06/95]
R WARNING
Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. Never
swing it around the neck over the inside shoulder. Never
use a single belt for more than one person or across more
than one seating position. Each seating position in your
vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made
up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be
used as a pair. Failure to follow these precautions could
increase the risk and/or severity of injury in a collision.
*
[SR02100(ALL)06/95]
R WARNING
Never drive or ride with a twisted or jammed safety belt.
If you cannot untwist or unjam the safety belt, see the
nearest qualified technician immediately.
*
[SR02200(ALL)06/95]
R WARNING
Children should always ride with the seatback in the
fully upright position. When the seatback is not fully
upright, there is a greater risk that the child will slide
under the safety belt and be seriously injured in a
collision.
*
[SR02300(ALL)08/95]
R WARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a collision.
*
[SR02700(ALL)09/95]
R WARNING
Lock the doors of your vehicle before driving to lessen
the risk of the door coming open in a collision.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
11
%
*
[SR10000(ALL)05/95] Combination Lap and Shoulder Belts
[SR10050(ALL)06/95]
While your vehicle is in motion, the combination lap and
shoulder belt adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake
hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the lap and shoulder belt locks and helps to
reduce your forward movement.
*
[SR10200(ALL)05/95]
After you get into your vehicle, close the door and lock it. Then
adjust the seat to the position that suits you best.
[SR10400(ALL)06/95]
To fasten the belt, pull the combination lap and shoulder belt
from the retractor so that the shoulder portion of the belt
crosses your shoulder and chest. Be sure the belt is not twisted.
If it is, remove the twist. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the
tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on tongue.
[SR10420(ALL)06/95]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040315-A
Fastening the front seat combination lap and shoulder belt
[SR10430(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Be sure to read and understand Important Safety Belt
Information at the beginning of this chapter.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
12
[SR10450(ALL)06/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0040314-A
Unfastening the combination lap and shoulder belts — front and rear outboard
seating positions
[SR10500(ALL)01/93]
Third-row passengers should be aware that the proper safety
belt for their seating position is slightly behind their seat. They
should not use the second-row safety belts which are in front of
the third seat.
[SR10600(ALL)09/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040004-A
Fastening the rear seat combination lap and shoulder belt
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
13
*
[SR10700(ALL)05/95]
R WARNING
Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only.
Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. Never
swing it around the neck over the inside shoulder. Never
use a single belt for more than one person. Failure to
follow these precautions could increase the risk and/or
severity of injury in a collision.
*
[SR10800(ALL)05/95]
To tighten the lap portion of the belt, pull up on the shoulder
belt until it fits you snugly. The belt should rest as low on your
hips as possible.
[SR10850(ALL)02/95]
The passenger seated near the sliding door in the
three-passenger bench seat can route the safety belt webbing
under the guide located on the head restraint. This safety belt
guide is designed to help keep the safety belt webbing properly
positioned across the passenger’s chest for maximum comfort.
This guide is only needed when the two-passenger second row
bench seat is removed and the three-passenger bench seat is
moved up to the second-row position.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
14
[SR10900(ALL)09/93]
27-1/2 pica
art:0040029-A
Using the seat belt guide with the three-passenger bench seat in the second row
position
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
15
[SR11100(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: The second row two-passenger bench seat has a
unique safety restraint system. If your vehicle has the
two-passenger bench seat it is very important that the
unique safety belt system is used properly. Please
read Auxiliary safety restraint system for the second
row bench seat in this section, which explains the
unique safety belt system. Be sure that you
understand it before anyone rides in the
two-passenger bench seat.
[SR11115(ALL)06/95]
Passenger Outboard Lap/Shoulder Belts
[SR11117(ALL)06/95]
All seats except the driver’s seat and the third seat middle
position are equipped with a dual locking mode retractor on the
shoulder belt portion of the lap/shoulder safety belt. (The
driver’s seat has only a vehicle sensitive locking mode and the
third seat middle position has a lap belt without a retractor
—description follows.)
[SR11125(ALL)06/95]
Dual Locking Mode Retractors Operate in Two Ways:
*
[SR11130(ALL)08/95]
Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode
*
[SR11140(ALL)06/95]
In this operating mode, the shoulder belt retractor will allow the
occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on hard
braking, hard cornering or impacts of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
16
%
*
[SR11150(ALL)08/95]
Automatic locking mode
*
[SR11160(ALL)08/95]
In this operating mode, the shoulder belt retractor will be
automatically locked and will remain locked when the
combination lap/shoulder safety belt is buckled, and does not
allow the occupant freedom of movement. This mode provides
the following:
*
[SR11163(ALL)08/95]
■ A tight lap/shoulder belt on the occupant.
*
[SR11165(ALL)08/95]
■ Child safety seat installation.
[SR11180(ALL)05/96]
R WARNING
Rear-facing infant seats or infant carriers should never be
placed in the front seats.
*
[SR11190(ALL)09/95]
This mode must be used when installing a child safety seat on
the front passenger seat and rear outboard seats where dual
locking retractors are provided.
*
[SR11200(ALL)08/95]
To switch the retractor from the emergency locking mode to the
automatic locking mode, perform the following steps:
*
[SR11210(ALL)08/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt.
*
[SR11220(ALL)09/95] 2. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward
until all of the belt is extracted and, when allowed to retract,
a clicking sound is heard. At this time, the belt retractor is in
the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode).
*
[SR11230(ALL)08/95] 3. A clicking sound will continue to be heard as the belt is
allowed to retract. This indicates that the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode.
*
[SR11240(ALL)08/95]
NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulder belt is unbuckled
and allowed to retract completely, the retractor will
switch to the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking
mode. See the detailed instructions under Safety Seats
for Children in this chapter.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
17
%
*
[SR11250(ALL)08/95]
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
*
[SR11260(ALL)08/95]
Driver and right front passenger
*
[SR11270(ALL)06/95]
You can adjust the shoulder belt height to one of five (5)
positions.
[SR11280(ALL)06/95]
To adjust the belt down, pinch the release button. To adjust the
belt up, pinch the release button and slide the adjuster up.
*
[SR11285(ALL)06/95]
Make sure the adjuster is firmly in one of the five positions. The
belt should be adjusted up or down until the belt rests on your
shoulder near your neck.
[SR11288(ALL)07/95]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040317-A
The shoulder belt height adjuster
*
[SR11290(ALL)06/95]
R WARNING
Position the shoulder belt height adjuster so that the belt
rests across the middle of your shoulder. Be sure the
shoulder belt is properly positioned on your shoulder
each time you use the belt. If the shoulder belt is off
your shoulder, on your upper arm or neck, there is a
greater risk of severe injury in a collision.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
18
[SR11295(ALL)06/95]
Lap Belt Without a Retractor (for the three-passenger
bench seat)
[SR11300(ALL)01/93]
The center seat of the three-passenger bench seat has a lap belt
without a retractor. To make the belt longer, tip the tongue at a
right angle to the belt and pull the belt over your lap until the
tongue reaches the buckle.
*
[SR11700(ALL)06/95]
To fasten the belt, pull the belt across your hips and insert the
tongue into the correct buckle on your seat until you hear a
snap and feel it lock. Make sure the buckle is securely fastened.
*
[SR11800(ALL)05/95]
Adjust the belt so that it fits snugly and as low as possible
around the hips:
*
[SR11900(ALL)06/95]
■ If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten it and repeat the
procedure above.
*
[SR12000(ALL)06/95]
■ If you need to shorten the belt, pull on the loose end of the
webbing.
[SR12100(ALL)01/93]
To store the belt:
[SR12200(ALL)01/93]
Fasten the center tongue and buckle when not in use. This will
prevent the belt from falling between the seat and the seatback.
[SR12205(ALL)06/95]
Auxiliary Safety Restraint System for the Second Row
Bench Seat (7 passenger vehicle)
*
[SR12210(ALL)11/93]
There is a unique safety restraint system for the outside seating
position of the second row bench seat. It is very important that
you read and understand this section before anyone rides in the
outside seating position (near the sliding door) of the
two-passenger bench seat.
[SR12215(ALL)06/95]
The two-passenger bench seat in the second row has a safety
restraint system made up of two buckles and two tongues.
There is an anchor location at the bottom of the C-pillar and
another anchor location at the top of the C-pillar that attach
each end of the seat belt webbing to the bodyside.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
19
[SR12220(ALL)06/95]
One of the seat belt tongues has two “windows” (or holes) and
the other has only one “window.” The seat belt tongue with one
window attaches to the buckle mounted to the side of the seat.
The seat belt tongue with two windows should be pulled across
the passenger’s chest and fastened to the buckle mounted in the
standard location in the middle of the seat.
[SR12225(ALL)06/95]
24 pica art:0040036-C
The auxiliary safety retraint system for the second row bench seat
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
20
[SR12230(ALL)06/95]
17-1/2 pica art:0040037-E
The auxiliary safety restraint system fastened
[SR12235(ALL)06/95]
A twisted belt may prevent the retractor from working
properly. If the unique safety belt system is twisted, disengage
the single window tongue from the buckle on the side of the
seat, remove the twist and re-install the tongue into the buckle
until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage.
[SR12240(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: If the three-passenger bench seat is moved up to the
second-row position, the outside passenger (near the
sliding door) only needs to use the double window
tongue and the standard buckle. Because the third-row
seat is wider and is closer to the sliding door, the
single window tongue and the auxiliary buckle are
not necessary.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
21
[SR12245(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040039-B
Unfastening the auxiliary safety restraint system
[SR12250(ALL)06/95]
Both tongues must be attached to their appropriate buckles
whenever someone is riding in that seating position.
[SR12255(ALL)06/95]
When the two-passenger bench seat is removed from the
vehicle, you must detach the single window tongue from the
auxiliary buckle.
[SR12260(ALL)06/95]
Third-row passengers must be very careful when exiting if the
auxiliary restraint system is being used by a second-row
passenger. It is important to step over the seat belt guide and
belt webbing to avoid tripping.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
22
[SR12265(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040038-C
Exiting a vehicle with the auxiliary safety restraint system
[SR12270(ALL)06/95]
Labels are provided on the back of the second-row bench seat
to remind passengers to use care when exiting.
%
*
[SR12900(ALL)08/95]
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
[SR13000(ALL)06/95]
A safety belt may be too short even when it is fully extended.
You can add about eight inches (20 cm) to the belt length with
a safety belt extension assembly. Safety belt extensions are
available at no cost (part number 611C22) from your dealer.
*
[SR13105(ALL)08/95]
R WARNING
Failure to follow these instructions will affect the
performance of the safety belts and increase the risk of
personal injury.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
23
%
*
[SR13110(ALL)08/95] Safety Belt Maintenance
*
[SR13120(ALL)02/96]
Check the safety belt systems periodically to make sure that
they work properly and are not damaged.
*
[SR13140(ALL)07/95]
All safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front
seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if so equipped),
child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if so equipped), and
attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision. Ford
recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles
involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was
minor and a qualified technician finds that the belts do not
show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not
need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a
collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage
or improper operation is noted.
%
*
[SR13150(ALL)06/95]
Cleaning the Safety Belts
*
[SR13160(ALL)04/95]
Clean the safety belts with any mild soap solution that is
recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Do not bleach
or dye the belt because this may weaken it.
%
*
[SR13200(ALL)06/95] Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)
*
[SR13215(ALL)05/95]
The driver and right front passenger air bags are Supplemental
Restraint Systems (SRS), provided at these seating positions in
addition to the lap/shoulder belt, and are designed to
supplement the protection provided to properly belted
occupants in moderate to severe frontal collisions. The
supplemental air bag system does not provide restraint to the
lower body.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
24
%
*
[SR13220(ALL)05/95]
The Importance of Wearing Safety Belts
*
[SR13230(ALL)06/95]
R WARNING
Safety belts must be worn by all vehicle occupants to be
properly restrained and help reduce the risk of injury in
a collision.
*
[SR13235(ALL)05/95]
R WARNING
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should
always wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
Supplemental Restraint System is provided.
[SR13240(ALL)09/93]
There are four very important reasons to use safety belts even
with a supplemental air bag system. Use your safety belts to:
[SR13250(ALL)09/93]
■ help keep you in the proper position when the supplemental
air bag inflates
[SR13260(ALL)05/93]
■ reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side or rear impact
accidents. The air bag supplemental restraint system is not
designed to inflate in such situations
*
[SR13270(ALL)01/95]
■ reduce the risk of harm in frontal collisions that are not
severe enough to activate the supplemental air bag
*
[SR13280(ALL)01/95]
■ reduce the risk of being thrown from your vehicle
%
*
[SR13290(ALL)01/95]
The Importance of Being Properly Seated
*
[SR13300(ALL)05/95]
In a collision, the air bag must inflate extremely fast to help
provide additional protection for you. In order to do this, the
air bag must inflate with considerable force. If you are not
seated in a normal riding position with your back against the
seatback, the air bag may not protect you properly and could
possibly hurt you as it inflates.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
25
*
[SR13301(ALL)08/95]
R WARNING
If a passenger is not properly seated and restrained, an
inflating air bag could cause serious injury.
*
[SR13302(ALL)09/95]
R WARNING
Rear-facing infant seats should never be placed in the
front seat.
*
[SR13303(ALL)07/95]
In rear-facing infant seats, the infant’s head is closer to the air
bag. The force of the rapidly inflating air bag could push the
top of the rear-facing seat against the vehicle seatback or center
armrests (if so equipped), or center console (if so equipped).
REAR-FACING INFANT CARRIERS MUST ALWAYS BE
SECURED IN THE REAR SEAT, and other child safety seats
and infant seats should be secured in the rear seat whenever
possible.
*
[SR13304(ALL)07/95]
Your vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger air bag.
Air bags deploy with great force, faster than the blink of an eye.
Front passengers, especially children and small adults, must
never sit on the front edge of the seat, stand near the glove
compartment of the instrument panel, or lean over near the air
bag cover when the vehicle is moving. All occupants should sit
with their backs against the seatback, move the seat to the most
rearward position if possible and use the safety belts. Children
weighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) always should use child or
infant seats.
%
*
[SR13305(ALL)07/95]
R WARNING
When using forward-facing child seats move the
passenger seat as far back from the instrument panel as
possible. NEVER SECURE REAR-FACING INFANT
SEATS IN THE FRONT SEAT.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
26
*
[SR13306(ALL)11/95]
The force of the rapidly inflating passenger air bag could push
the top of the rear-facing seat against the vehicle seatback,
armrests or console. Rear-facing infant seats must always be
secured in the rear seat.
*
[SR13307(ALL)07/95]
R WARNING
Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the
air bag cover on the steering wheel or in front seat areas
that may come in contact with a deploying air bag.
Failure to follow this instruction may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a collision.
*
[SR13308(ALL)07/95]
For further information about the proper mounting of
equipment in the front seat of this vehicle, please refer to Ford’s
brochure entitled Some Important Information About Air Bag
Supplemental Restraint System which can be obtained by calling
Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356. Ask for brochure FPS-8602.
*
[SR13309(ALL)08/95]
For additional important safety information on the proper use of
seat belts, child seats, and infant seats, please read the other
sections of this chapter of the Owner Guide, especially sections
entitled Safety Belts for Children and Safety Seats for Children.
%
*
[SR13310(ALL)01/95]
How the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System
Operates
*
[SR13315(ALL)06/95]
The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System consists of the
driver and passenger air bags, impact sensors, a system
diagnostic module, a readiness light and tone, and the electrical
wiring which connects the components.
*
[SR13320(ALL)06/95]
The driver air bag is in the center of the steering wheel. The
front passenger seat air bag is located in the center of the
instrument panel ledge above the glove compartment. Both air
bags are designed to stay out of sight until they are activated.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
27
[SR13330(ALL)07/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040312-A
The location of air bags and warning labels
*
[SR13340(ALL)07/95]
If a collision occurs, the sensors sense the severity of the impact
and activate the air bags if necessary. The air bag system is
designed to deploy in frontal and front-angled collisions more
severe than hitting a parked vehicle (of similar size and weight)
head-on at about 28 mph (45 km/h). Because the system senses
the crash severity rather than vehicle speed, some frontal
collisions at speeds above 28 mph (45 km/h) will not inflate the
air bag.
*
[SR13350(ALL)12/95]
When the sensors activate the system, the air bags inflate
rapidly, filling with non-toxic nitrogen gas in a fraction of a
second. Immediately after inflation, the air bags deflate by
releasing the nitrogen gas through vent holes. The whole
process takes place in a matter of seconds.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
28
*
[SR13360(ALL)07/95]
R WARNING
Air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do
not touch them after inflation.
[SR13370(ALL)07/95]
half page art:0040264-A
Inflated driver side supplemental air bag
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
29
[SR13380(ALL)07/95]
half page art:0040297-A
Inflated passenger side supplemental air bag
*
[SR13390(ALL)07/95]
R WARNING
If the air bag is inflated, THE AIR BAG WILL NOT
FUNCTION AGAIN AND MUST BE REPLACED
IMMEDIATELY. If the air bag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
*
[SR13400(ALL)07/95]
To ensure that the air bag system will operate as intended in a
crash, the system is equipped with a diagnostic module, which
controls a readiness lamp and a warning tone. The diagnostic
module monitors its own circuits, the air bag electrical system,
the air bag readiness light, the air bag power, and the air bag
inflators.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
30
%
*
[SR13410(ALL)05/95]
The air bag system uses a readiness light on the instrument
cluster and a tone to indicate the condition of the system. When
you turn the ignition key to the ON position, this light will
illuminate for approximately six (6) seconds and then turn off.
This indicates that the system is operating normally. NOTE:
Maintenance of the air bag system is not required.
%
*
[SR13420(ALL)06/95]
A problem with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following:
*
[SR13430(ALL)06/95]
■ the readiness light will either flash or stay lit,
*
[SR13440(ALL)06/95]
■ or it will not light immediately after ignition is turned on,
*
[SR13450(ALL)06/95]
■ or a group of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will
repeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
[SR13460(ALL)06/95]
If any of these things happen, have the air bag system serviced
at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the air bag supplemental restraint system may not
function properly in the event of a collision.
*
[SR13500(ALL)07/95]
R WARNING
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Air Bag
Supplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See your
Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
[SR13550(ALL)07/95]
Disposal of supplemental air bags or supplemental air
bag equipped vehicles
*
[SR13560(ALL)06/95]
For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, see your
local Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Air bags MUST be
disposed of by qualified personnel.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
31
%
*
[SR13970(ALL)05/95] Safety Restraints for Children
*
[SR13980(ALL)02/95]
In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by law to use safety
restraints for children. If small children ride in your vehicle —
this generally includes children who are four years old or
younger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) or less — you must
put them in safety seats that are made specially for children.
Safety belts alone do not provide maximum protection for these
children. Check your local and state laws for specific
requirements.
*
[SR13990(ALL)08/95]
R WARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a collision.
*
[SR14000(ALL)07/95]
R WARNING
To prevent the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
*
[SR14100(ALL)12/95]
R WARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
32
[SR14150(ALL)07/95]
R WARNING
Whenever possible, put children in one of the rear seats
in your vehicle. Accident statistics indicate that children
are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than
in the front seats.
*
[SR14901(ALL)02/96]
R WARNING
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions
included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If
you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the
child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.
*
[SR14920(ALL)08/95]
R WARNING
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that
has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you
place a child anywhere near them.
[SR14930(ALL)05/96]
R WARNING
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
%
*
[SR15100(ALL)01/95]
Safety Seats for Children
*
[SR15200(ALL)05/95]
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight
of the child. Always follow the safety seat manufacturer’s
instructions when installing and using the safety seat.
*
[SR15300(ALL)08/95]
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top
tether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position
which is capable of providing a tether anchorage. For more
information on top tether straps see Attaching Safety Seats With
Tether Straps in this chapter.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
33
*
[SR15320(ALL)08/95]
When installing a child safety seat, be sure to use the correct
safety belt buckle for that seating position, and make sure the
tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. For a shoulder/lap
belt combination with a sliding tongue, make sure the retractor
is in the automatic locking mode.
*
[SR15321(ALL)07/95]
All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or by the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.
%
*
[SR15325(ALL)05/95]
R WARNING
REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD NEVER BE
USED IN THE FRONT SEAT. REAR-FACING INFANT
SEATS MUST ALWAYS BE PLACED IN THE REAR
SEAT. Failure to follow these instructions could result in
serious injury.
*
[SR15327(ALL)06/95]
R WARNING
If you do not properly secure the safety seat, the child
occupying the seat may be injured during a collision or
sudden stop. An unsecured safety seat could also injure
other passengers.
*
[SR15329(ALL)02/96]
R WARNING
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions
included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If
you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the
child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
34
[SR15330(ALL)06/95]
The passenger side quick-release second row bucket seat is
adjustable along a track and may be adjusted very close to the
front passenger seat to allow easier entry and exit to third row
seats.
[SR15335(ALL)06/95]
R WARNING
The quick-release seat must be adjusted to the rearmost
position when using an untethered forward-facing child
safety seat.
[SR15340(ALL)05/95]
R WARNING
The third row seat must be adjusted to the rearmost
position when using an untethered forward facing child
safety seat.
*
[SR15350(ALL)07/95]
R WARNING
Always keep the buckle release button pointing upward
and away from the child seat, with the tongue between
the child seat and the release button as shown in the
following illustration.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
35
[SR15420(ALL)06/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040316-A
Safety belt buckle placement for child seats
[SR18250(ALL)09/93] Using the Automatic Locking Mode
Retractor to Secure a Child Safety Seat
*
[SR19770(ALL)06/95]
Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking mode retractor on
the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety
belt for the front passenger seat and rear outer seats. The
automatic locking mode must be used when installing a child
seat or infant carrier in the front passenger seat or rear outer
seats.
*
[SR19780(ALL)09/95]
R WARNING
Never install a rear-facing child seat or infant carrier in
the right front passenger seat.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
36
[SR19790(ALL)04/95]
To install a child safety seat or infant carrier, follow these steps:
[SR19830(ALL)04/95] 1. Position the child seat or infant carrier in the vehicle seat. If
you are using the moveable third row seat in the third row
position, the passenger side second row bucket seat, or the
front passenger seat, slide the seat to the rearmost position.
[SR19840(ALL)04/95] 2. Follow the child seat or infant carrier manufacturer’s
instructions. Route the safety belt through the child seat or
infant carrier and insert the safety belt tongue into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child safety seat manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.
[SR19845(ALL)09/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040275-A
Routing the safety belt tongue through the child seat
[SR19850(ALL)07/93] 3. Pull on the belt until all of the stored belt is out of the
retractor and a click is heard.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
37
[SR19860(ALL)07/93] 4. Allow the belt to retract. A clicking sound will be heard as
the belt retracts. This indicates that the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode.
[SR19870(ALL)09/93] 5. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove slack in the belt
while you push down on the child seat.
[SR19871(ALL)09/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040276-B
Removing slack from the safety belt
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
38
[SR19872(ALL)09/93] 6. Before placing the child in the child seat or infant carrier,
use force to tilt the seat from side to side, and tug it forward
to make sure that the seat is securely held in place.
[SR19873(ALL)06/94]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040277-B
Testing the security of the child seat
[SR19875(ALL)09/93] 7. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode.
Try to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the
belt is in the automatic locking mode.
[SR19878(ALL)04/95] 8. Check to make sure the child seat or infant carrier is
properly secured prior to each use. If the safety belt is not
locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.
[SR19885(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: When the lap/shoulder belt is unbuckled and allowed
to retract completely, the retractor will switch to the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
39
[SR19890(ALL)07/95]
The automatic locking mode is activated whenever all of the
belt webbing is pulled out of the retractor.
[SR19910(ALL)07/95]
While in this mode, the belt will retract or tighten but cannot be
pulled back out to obtain more length. To disengage the
automatic locking mode, unbuckle the belt and allow the
webbing to retract fully.
%
*
[SR19950(ALL)06/95]
Attaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps
*
[SR19970(ALL)06/95]
Some manufacturers make safety seats that include a tether
strap that goes over the back of the vehicle seat and attaches to
an anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap
as an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of your child safety
seat for information about ordering a tether strap.
[SR20000(ALL)01/93]
All vehicles built for sale in Canada include tether anchor
hardware for use with Canadian child safety seats. The tether
anchor hardware is located in the tire changing tool kit.
Additional tether anchor hardware can be obtained at no charge
from any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
[SR20100(ALL)02/94]
Vehicles built for sale in the USA do not include tether anchor
hardware, but it can be obtained at no charge from any Ford or
Lincoln-Mercury dealer (Part number F3XY-12613D20-A).
[SR20205(ALL)12/94]
The chart below specifies, for each seat type and position, where
the tether strap must be attached to the vehicle and the section
containing the appropriate instructions for tethering.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
40
[SR20210(ALL)05/96]
sixteen pica
chart:0040295-B
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
41
[SR20220(ALL)12/94]
Tethering to floor anchor
[SR20300(ALL)01/93]
Ford recommends placing tethered safety seats in a rear seating
position with the tether strap attached to the tether anchoring
point as shown in the following illustration.
[SR20400(ALL)09/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040042-A
Tether anchor point locations
[SR20500(ALL)01/93]
To gain access to the anchoring bolt, cut through the plastic
along the U-shaped tether location outlines on the carpet of the
luggage area. Remove the bolt that is currently in the anchor
location. The tether anchor hardware has been preassembled. To
attach it, orient the tab in the bracket toward the front of the
vehicle and securely tighten the bolt. Follow the child safety
seat directions for attaching the tether strap to the anchor
bracket.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
42
*
[SR20510(ALL)06/95]
R WARNING
Only use the tether attachment hole locations shown in
the illustrations. The tether anchor may not perform
properly if the wrong mounting location is used.
*
[SR20520(ALL)05/95]
R WARNING
Failure to follow these precautions could increase the
chance of injury in an accident.
*
[SR20530(ALL)05/95]
R WARNING
If the anchor bolt(s) is ever removed, the hole(s) in the
floor must be sealed to prevent the possibility of exhaust
fumes entering the passenger compartment.
[SR20760(ALL)12/94]
Tethering to lap/shoulder belt tongue
[SR20770(ALL)05/96]
To attach a tether strap to a lap/shoulder belt:
[SR20775(ALL)05/96] 1. Route the tether strap under the headrest and between the
headrest supports.
[SR20780(ALL)05/96] 2. Hook the tether strap hook into the large hole at the end of
the tongue of the lap/shoulder belt directly behind the child
seat position.
[SR20785(ALL)05/96] 3. Adjust the tether strap length until the hook is about one
foot behind the seatback.
[SR20790(ALL)05/96] 4. Pull the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended
and a click is heard. At this time the belt is in automatic
locking mode (child restraint mode).
[SR20795(ALL)05/96] 5. Let the retractor wind up the slack from the lap/shoulder
belt. A clicking sound should be heard as the belt retracts,
indicating that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode.
Tighten the tether strap to remove any slack.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
43
[SR20800(ALL)05/96] 6. Before placing a child in the child restraint, use force to tilt
the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to
make sure it is securely held in place.
[SR20805(ALL)05/96] 7. Check that the retractor is in automatic locking mode by
trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot
pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in
automatic locking mode.
[SR20810(ALL)05/96] 8. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured
prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 4
through 7.
[SR20840(ALL)12/94]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040296-A
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
44
%
*
[SR20845(ALL)07/95]
Safety Belts for Children
[SR20850(ALL)06/95]
Children who are too large for child safety seats should always
wear safety belts. (See instructions with your child seat, or
contact its manufacturer, to determine maximum size of a child
that will fit safely in the safety seat.)
*
[SR20855(ALL)07/95]
R WARNING
If safety belts are not properly worn and adjusted as
described, the risk of serious injury to the child in a
collision will be much greater.
[SR20860(ALL)06/95]
R WARNING
If the shoulder belt portion of one of the lap/shoulder
belts can be positioned so that it does not cross or rest in
front of the child’s face or neck, the child should wear
the lap/shoulder belt. Moving the child closer to the
center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder
belt fit.
*
[SR20865(ALL)07/95]
To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford recommends use of a
belt-positioning booster seat that is labelled as conforming to all
Federal motor vehicle safety standards. Belt-positioning booster
seats raise the child and provide a shorter, firmer seating
cushion that encourages safer seating posture and better fit of
lap and shoulder belts on the child. A belt-positioning booster
should be used if the shoulder belt rests in front of the child’s
face or neck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly on both
thighs, or if the thighs are too short to let the child sit all the
way back on the seat cushion when the lower legs hang over
the edge of the seat cushion. You may wish to discuss the
specific needs of your child with your pediatrician.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
45
*
[SR20870(ALL)07/95]
R WARNING
Do not use a belt-positioning booster with a lap-only
belt.
[SR20875(ALL)06/95]
R WARNING
The lap belt portion of combination lap/shoulder belts
should always be worn snugly and below the hips,
touching the child’s thighs.
*
[SR20880(ALL)06/95]
R WARNING
Children should always ride with the seatback in the
fully upright position. When the seatback is not fully
upright, there is a greater risk that the child will slide
under the safety belt and be seriously injured in a
collision.
[SR20895(ALL)06/95]
Built-In Child Seats (If equipped)
[SR20900(ALL)06/95]
The optional second row bench seat includes two built-in child
seats. These child restraints are to be used only by children
who:
[SR20940(ALL)06/95]
■ are at least one year old
[SR20960(ALL)06/95]
AND
[SR20980(ALL)06/95]
■ weigh between 9 and 27 kilograms (20 and 60 pounds)
[SR21000(ALL)06/95]
AND
[SR21025(ALL)07/95]
■ whose shoulders are below the shoulder harness slots
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
46
[SR21030(ALL)06/95]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040318-A
[SR21050(ALL)06/95]
Children not meeting these requirements should be restrained in
an approved aftermarket child safety seat. Follow the specific
manufacturer’s instructions for weight and height restrictions.
[SR21075(ALL)06/95]
Children must be properly buckled before riding in the vehicle.
It is the law in every state and province. These child seats
conform to all Federal/Canadian motor vehicle safety standards.
[SR21090(ALL)06/95]
R WARNING
The second row seatback must be fully locked before
operating the child restraint system. Check the position
of the seatback release lever.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
47
[SR21200(ALL)06/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040321-A
Second row bench built-in child seats
[SR21225(ALL)06/95]
Built-In Child Seat Retractors
[SR21250(ALL)06/95]
The retractor will switch from the emergency locking mode to
the automatic locking mode when the right shoulder belt is
pulled all the way out. The retractor will switch back to
emergency locking mode when the belts are unbuckled and the
shoulder belts retract completely.
[SR21275(ALL)06/95]
The automatic locking mode must be used to hold small
children in position, particularly sleeping children and those
who may try to squirm out of the belts. The emergency locking
mode is used while buckling the belts.
*
[SR21300(ALL)12/95]
Always adjust the lap and shoulder harness belts provided with
this child seat snugly around your child.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
48
[SR21350(ALL)06/95]
R WARNING
The child seats’ metal and plastic parts can become very
hot when left in the sun. These can cause burns to
unprotected skin.
*
[SR21375(ALL)08/95]
R WARNING
Failure to follow all of the instructions on the use of this
child restraint system can result in your child striking the
vehicle’s interior during a sudden stop or crash.
[SR21400(ALL)06/95]
How to Use the Built-In Child Seat
[SR21425(ALL)05/96]
Read the following procedures and all of the labels on the
built-in child seat before using the seat.
*
[SR21450(ALL)08/95]
R WARNING
Never use the Built-In Child Seat as a booster cushion
with the adult safety belts. A child using the adult belts
could slide forward and out from under the safety belts.
[SR21475(ALL)06/95] 1. Hold the tab from the lower outboard side of the child seat
and lower the cushion completely.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
49
[SR21500(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040322-A
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
50
[SR21525(ALL)06/95] 2. If connected, unbuckle the two safety belt tongues. Also
detach the chest clip.
[SR21530(ALL)06/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040320-A
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
51
[SR21550(ALL)06/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040319-A
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
52
[SR21575(ALL)06/95] 3. Place the child in the built-in child seat. Position the crotch
belt buckle between the child’s legs.
[SR21600(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040323-A
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
53
[SR21625(ALL)06/95] 4. Place the left shoulder belt harness over the child’s left
shoulder. Insert the left shoulder harness tongue into the left
side of the belt buckle. Confirm that the left shoulder
harness tongue indicator is green.
[SR21650(ALL)07/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040324-A
[SR21675(ALL)06/95] 5. Place the right shoulder belt harness over the child’s right
shoulder. Insert the right shoulder harness tongue into the
right side of the belt buckle. Confirm that the right shoulder
harness tongue indicator is green.
[SR21700(ALL)06/95] 6. Fasten the two halves of the chest clip below the child’s
shoulders. Adjust the clip to comfortably hold the shoulder
belts in place on the child’s chest. Confirm that the chest clip
indicator is green.
[SR21725(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: The chest clip can be easily pulled apart and is
designed to separate during a collision.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
54
[SR21750(ALL)07/95] 7. Pull the right shoulder belt fully out to put the retractor into
the locking mode. At this time, the shoulder belts are in an
automatic locking mode. Allow the safety belts to tighten
snugly against the child’s shoulders. The belt will
automatically lock and cannot be pulled out.
[SR21775(ALL)06/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040325-A
[SR21800(ALL)06/95] 8. If the shoulder belts are too tight, unlatch the chest clip and
unbuckle the child from the built-in child seat. Allow the
shoulder belts to retract fully. Repeat the procedure from
step 3 through step 7.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
Safety Restraints
55
[SR21825(ALL)06/95]
Removing the child from the built-in child seat
[SR21850(ALL)06/95] 1. Open the chest clip by squeezing together the release tabs on
the top and bottom edges of the center of the chest clip. Pull
the two halves apart.
[SR21860(ALL)06/95] 2. Press the release button on the crotch belt buckle.
[SR21875(ALL)06/95] 3. Slide the shoulder belts off the child’s shoulders. Remove the
child from the built-in child seat.
[SR21925(ALL)06/95] 4. Confirm that the shoulder belts are fully retracted and
resting inside the built-in child seat recess. It is unnecessary
to reconnect the shoulder harness and belt buckle prior to
storing the built-in child seat.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
56
[SR21950(ALL)06/95] 5. While holding the cushion release strap, rotate the cushion
upward until it fits flush with the second row seatback pad.
[SR21975(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040326-A
[SR22000(ALL)06/95] 6. Confirm that the built-in child seat is locked in the stowed
position by grasping the safety seat cushion and attempting
to lower it without pulling the cushion release strap.
[SR22025(ALL)07/95] 7. If the built-in child seat is not locked in the stowed position,
repeat steps 4 through 6.
File:03vxsrn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:21:10 1996
57
Starting Your Villager
*
[ST02400(ALL)03/95] Ignition
*
[ST02500(ALL)01/95]
Understanding the Positions of the Ignition
[ST02600(ALL)06/95]
Your vehicle’s ignition has four positions. They are:
*
[ST02700(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040047-D
The ignition positions
*
[ST02800(ALL)01/93]
ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warning lights to make
sure they work before you start the engine. The key returns to
the ON position once the engine is started and remains in this
position while the engine runs.
[ST02900(ALL)06/95]
START cranks the engine. Release the key once the engine starts
so that you don’t damage the starter. The key should return to
the ON position when you release it.
[ST03000(ALL)06/95]
OFF/LOCK allows you to shut off the engine and all accessories
and locks the gearshift lever. Removing the key then locks the
steering wheel.
File:04vxstn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:20:06 1996
58
[ST03200(ALL)01/93]
ACCESSORY allows you to operate some of your vehicle’s
electrical accessories while the engine is not running. For
example, you can use ACCESSORY to turn on the radio,
windshield wipers, or operate the cigarette lighter without
starting the engine.
%
*
[ST03300(ALL)03/95]
Ignition Key Chime
[ST03400(ALL)02/95]
The chime will sound if you open the driver’s door while the
key is in the ignition. Never leave your vehicle unattended with
the key in the ignition.
%
*
[ST03500(ALL)02/95]
Removing the Key From the Ignition
[ST03600(ALL)06/95]
OFF/LOCK is the only position that allows you to remove the
key from the ignition. The LOCK feature helps to protect your
vehicle from theft, because it also locks the steering wheel and
the gearshift lever when the key is removed.
%
*
[ST03700(ALL)01/93]
If your key is stuck in the LOCK position, and you are unable
to turn it, move your steering wheel left or right until the key
turns freely.
*
[ST03800(ALL)01/93]
To remove your key from the ignition:
*
[ST03900(ALL)05/95] 1. Put the gearshift lever in P (Park).
*
[ST04000(ALL)02/95] 2. Set the parking brake fully.
*
[ST04100(ALL)03/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
*
[ST04200(ALL)03/95] 4. Remove the key.
*
[ST04300(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
When you leave your vehicle, place the gearshift lever in
P (Park). Set the parking brake fully, and shut off the
engine. Never park your vehicle in N (Neutral). If you do
not take these precautions, your vehicle may move
suddenly and injure someone.
File:04vxstn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:20:06 1996
Starting Your Villager
59
*
[ST04500(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets alone in
your vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves
or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle.
Further, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause
severe and possibly fatal injuries to people as well as
animals.
%
*
[ST04600(ALL)03/95] Fuel-Injected Engines
*
[ST04700(ALL)03/95]
When starting a fuel-injected engine, the most important thing
to remember is to avoid pressing down on the accelerator
before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you
have problems getting your vehicle started. See Starting Your
Engine in this chapter for details about when to use the
accelerator while you start your vehicle.
[ST04750(ALL)02/95] Starting Your Vehicle
%
*
[ST04800(ALL)05/94]
Preparing to Start Your Vehicle
*
[ST04900(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or other
enclosed area. Never sit in a stopped vehicle for more
than a short period of time with the engine running.
Exhaust fumes are toxic. See Guarding Against Exhaust
Fumes in this chapter for more instructions.
*
[ST04950(ALL)01/93]
Before you start your vehicle, always:
*
[ST05000(ALL)01/93] 1. Make sure you and all your passengers buckle your safety
belts. See Safety belts in the Index for more details.
*
[ST05100(ALL)03/95] 2. Make sure the headlamps and other accessories are turned
off when starting.
File:04vxstn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:20:06 1996
60
*
[ST05200(ALL)03/95] 3. Make sure that the gearshift is in P (Park) and the parking
brake is set before you turn the key.
[ST05400(ALL)04/95] 4. Test the warning lights on the instrument cluster to make
sure they work. Refer to the Warning Lights and Gauges
chapter.
*
[ST05700(ALL)02/95]
Starting Your Engine
*
[ST05800(ALL)02/95]
To start your engine:
*
[ST05900(ALL)05/95] 1. Follow the steps under Preparing to Start Your Vehicle at the
beginning of this section.
*
[ST06000(ALL)01/93] 2. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and turn the ignition key
to ON.
*
[ST06100(ALL)03/95] 3. DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal when starting your
engine. DO NOT use the accelerator while the vehicle is
parked.
*
[ST06200(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the key to the START position (cranking) until the
engine starts. Allow the key to return to the ON position
after the engine has started.
*
[ST06300(ALL)02/95] If you have difficulty in turning the key, rotate the steering
wheel slightly because it may be binding.
*
[ST06900(ALL)04/94]
For a cold engine:
*
[ST07000(ALL)06/95]
■ At temperatures 10˚F (-12˚C) and below: If the engine does
not start in fifteen (15) seconds on the first try, turn the key
to OFF, wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not
flood the engine, then try again.
*
[ST07100(ALL)04/95]
■ At temperatures above 10˚F (-12˚C): If the engine does not
start in five (5) seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF,
wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not flood the
engine, then try again.
File:04vxstn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:20:06 1996
Starting Your Villager
61
*
[ST07200(ALL)04/94]
For a warm engine:
*
[ST07300(ALL)04/95]
■ Do not hold the key in the START position for more than
five (5) seconds at a time. If the engine does not start within
five (5) seconds on the first try, turn the key to the OFF
position. Wait a few seconds after the starter stops, then try
again.
*
[ST07350(ALL)05/95]
Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter or
flood the engine.
*
[ST07360(ALL)02/95]
After you start the engine, let it idle for a few seconds. Keep
your foot on the brake pedal and release the parking brake.
Put the gearshift lever in gear, slowly release the brake pedal
and drive away in the normal manner.
*
[ST07370(ALL)02/95]
NOTE: Your vehicle has an interlock that prevents you from
shifting out of Park (P) unless your foot is on the
brake pedal.
%
*
[ST07500(ALL)04/95]
If the engine does not start after two attempts:
*
[ST07600(ALL)04/95] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
*
[ST07700(ALL)04/95] 2. Press the accelerator all the way to the floor and hold it.
*
[ST07800(ALL)04/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to the START position.
*
[ST07900(ALL)04/95] 4. Release the ignition key when the engine starts.
*
[ST08000(ALL)04/95] 5. Release the accelerator gradually as the engine speeds up.
Then drive away in the normal manner.
*
[ST08100(ALL)04/95]
If the engine still does not start, the fuel pump shut-off switch
may have been triggered. For directions on how to reset the
switch see Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch later in this chapter.
File:04vxstn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:20:06 1996
62
*
[ST08200(ALL)05/95]
A computer system controls the engine’s idle speed. When you
start your vehicle, the engine’s idle speed normally runs high.
These faster engine speeds will make your vehicle move slightly
faster than its normal idle speed. It should, however, slow down
after a short time. If it does not, have the idle speed checked.
*
[ST08290(ALL)06/95]
If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, do
not allow your vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes. Have
the vehicle checked.
*
[ST08300(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very
high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
*
[ST08400(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or
other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can
start a fire.
*
[ST08500(ALL)03/95]
If you consistently start your vehicle in subzero temperatures,
use an engine block heater (if your vehicle has this option).
%
*
[ST08600(ALL)06/95]
Engine Block Heater (If equipped)
[ST08700(ALL)02/95]
Engine block heaters are strongly recommended if you live in a
region where temperatures reach s10˚F (s23˚C) or below. An
engine block heater warms the engine coolant, which improves
starting, warms up the engine faster, and allows the
heater-defrost system to respond more quickly.
*
[ST08900(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
File:04vxstn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:20:06 1996
Starting Your Villager
63
*
[ST09000(ALL)01/93]
For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours before
you start your vehicle. Using the heater for longer than three
hours will not damage the engine, so you can leave it plugged
in all night to start your vehicle the following morning.
%
*
[ST09005(ALL)02/95] What To Do If The Engine Does Not Start
%
*
[ST09010(ALL)02/95]
Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch
*
[ST09015(ALL)03/95]
If the engine cranks but does not start or does not start after a
collision, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been
triggered. The shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the
fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial
jolt.
*
[ST09020(ALL)03/95]
Once the shut-off switch is triggered, you must reset the switch
by hand before you can start your vehicle.
[ST09025(ALL)02/95]
The fuel pump shut-off switch reset button is located below the
hood release handle.
[ST09030(ALL)02/95]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040048-C
Fuel pump shut-off switch reset button location
File:04vxstn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:20:06 1996
64
*
[ST09035(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
If you see or smell fuel, do not reset the switch or try to
start your vehicle. Have all the passengers get out of the
vehicle and call the local fire department or a towing
service.
*
[ST09040(ALL)02/95]
If your engine cranks, but does not start after a collision:
*
[ST09045(ALL)02/95] 1. Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF position.
*
[ST09050(ALL)03/95] 2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel.
*
[ST09055(ALL)02/95] 3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push the fuel pump shut-off
reset button down. If the red button is already set, you may
have a different mechanical or electrical problem.
*
[ST09060(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position for a few seconds,
then turn it to the OFF position.
*
[ST09065(ALL)02/95] 5. Check under the vehicle again for leaking fuel. If you see or
smell fuel, do not start your vehicle again. If there is no fuel,
you can try to start your vehicle again.
*
[ST09070(ALL)02/95] 6. Check all vehicle warning lights before driving your vehicle.
%
*
[ST09100(ALL)05/95]
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
*
[ST09200(ALL)02/95]
Carbon monoxide, although colorless and odorless, is present in
exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.
*
[ST09300(ALL)02/95]
RWARNING
Never let your vehicle idle in an enclosed area, and do
not sit in a parked vehicle, (with the engine running) for
more than a short period of time. Exhaust fumes,
particularly carbon monoxide, might build up. These
fumes are harmful and could kill you.
File:04vxstn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:20:06 1996
Starting Your Villager
65
*
[ST09400(ALL)02/95]
RWARNING
If you ever smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your
vehicle, have your dealer inspect and fix your vehicle
immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
These fumes are harmful and could kill you.
*
[ST09500(ALL)02/95]
Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checked by a
qualified technician whenever:
*
[ST09600(ALL)02/95]
■ your vehicle is raised for service
*
[ST09700(ALL)02/95]
■ the sound of the exhaust system changes
*
[ST09800(ALL)02/95]
■ your vehicle has been damaged in an accident
*
[ST09900(ALL)02/95]
Improve your ventilation by keeping all air intake vents clear of
snow, leaves, and other objects.
*
[ST10000(ALL)03/95]
If the engine is idling while you are stopped in an open area
for long periods of time, open the windows at least one inch
(2.5 cm). Also, adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in
outside air.
*
[ST10100(ALL)02/95]
Read the section Climate Control Systems for instructions on
bringing fresh outside air into your vehicle. Refer to the Index.
File:04vxstn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:20:06 1996
67
Warning Lights and Gauges
[LG00410(ALL)04/94] Warning Lights and Gauges
[LG00420(ALL)04/95]
The instrument panel (dashboard) on your vehicle is divided
into several different sections. The illustrations on the following
pages show the major parts of the instrument panel described in
this chapter. Some items shown may not be on all vehicles.
[LG00430(ALL)04/94]
To clean the lenses on your instrument panel, use Ford Glass
Cleaner and a soft cloth. Never use paper towels or abrasive
cleaners; they can scratch the lenses.
[LG00440(ALL)01/93]
In your vehicle, the warning lights and gauges are grouped
together on the instrument panel. We call this grouping a
cluster. Your vehicle may have a mechanical cluster or an
electronic cluster.
*
[LG00450(ALL)05/94]
If you are not sure which cluster your vehicle has, check the
diagrams on the following pages.
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
68
[LG00500(ALL)01/93] Mechanical Cluster
[LG00600(ALL)04/95]
33-1/2 pica
art:0040049-H
Mechanical cluster
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
69
[LG00800(ALL)01/93]
The following warning lights and gauges are on the mechanical
cluster. All of the warning lights and gauges alert you to
possible problems with your vehicle. Some of the lights listed
are optional. The following section explains what each of these
indicators means.
*
[LG00850(ALL)01/95] Indicator Lights and Chimes
*
[LG00900(ALL)06/95]
Brake System Warning Light
*
[LG01000(ALL)03/95]
The warning light for the brakes can show two things — that
the parking brake is not fully released, or that the brake fluid
level is low in the master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level is
low, the brake system should be checked by your dealer or a
qualified service technician.
[LG01100(ALL)09/93]
6 pica art:0040050-A
Brake system and parking brake light
[LG01200(ALL)01/93]
The BRAKE light normally comes on when you turn the
ignition key to the ON position to verify that the indicator bulb
is working. If the light stays on or comes on when the engine is
running and after you have released the parking brake fully,
have the hydraulic brake system serviced.
*
[LG01300(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
The BRAKE light indicates that the brakes may not be
working properly. Have the brakes checked immediately.
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
70
%
*
[LG01400(ALL)02/95]
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light (If Equipped)
*
[LG01500(ALL)12/93]
To check the anti-lock brake warning light, turn the ignition key
to the ON position. The ABS warning light should glow
momentarily.
*
[LG01600(ALL)10/93]
NOTE: If it does not glow at all or stays on for a long time,
have your vehicle’s electrical system checked
immediately.
[LG01700(ALL)02/94]
6 pica art:0040051-B
Anti-lock brake system warning light
*
[LG01800(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
If the anti-lock brake system warning light remains on or
comes on while driving, have the braking system checked
by a qualified service technician as soon as possible.
*
[LG01810(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-lock system, and the brake
warning light is not lit, the anti-lock system is
disabled but normal brake function remains
operational.
%
*
[LG01900(ALL)05/95]
Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime
[LG02005(ALL)02/95]
This warning light and chime remind you to fasten your safety
belt.
[LG02010(ALL)04/95]
■ If the safety belt is not buckled when the ignition is turned
to the ON position, the chime will turn on for four (4) to
eight (8) seconds and the light will remain on continuously,
or until the safety belt is fastened.
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
71
*
[LG02025(ALL)03/95]
■ If the safety belt is buckled while the light is on and the
chime is sounding, both the light and chime will turn off.
[LG02035(ALL)05/95]
■ If the safety belt is buckled before the ignition is turned to
the ON position, the chime does not sound, and the warning
light will not illuminate.
[LG02100(ALL)09/93]
6 pica art:0040052-A
Safety belt warning light
*
[LG02125(ALL)01/95]
Air Bag Readiness Light
[LG02140(ALL)02/95]
The supplemental air bag system uses a readiness light to
indicate the condition of the system. If the system is functioning
properly, the light will stay on for about six (6) seconds when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
[LG02145(ALL)09/93]
If there is a problem with the system, the readiness light may
fail to illuminate, continue to flash, or remain on. If any of these
conditions occur, have the system serviced as soon as possible.
Unless the system is serviced, the supplemental air bag system
may not function properly in the event of a collision.
*
[LG02146(ALL)05/95]
A problem with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following: the readiness light will either flash or stay lit, or it
will not light, or a group of five beeps will be heard.
*
[LG02147(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have
the air bag system serviced at your Ford or
Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately.
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
72
[LG02150(ALL)09/93]
6 pica art:0040262-A
Supplemental air bag readiness light
*
[LG02200(ALL)03/95]
Check Engine Warning Light
[LG02300(ALL)01/93]
This light comes on when the electronic engine control system is
not working properly. This is the computer that controls the
operating conditions of the engine.
[LG02400(ALL)09/93]
6 pica art:0040053-A
Check engine warning light
[LG02500(ALL)09/93]
This light comes on briefly when you turn the ignition key to
ON, but should turn off when the engine starts. If the light does
not come on when you turn the ignition to ON or if it comes
on and stays on when you are driving, have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem
with one of the engine’s emission control systems. You do not
need to have your vehicle towed.
*
[LG02600(ALL)05/95]
If the light turns on and off briefly while you are driving, it
means that the condition is no longer present.
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
73
*
[LG02700(ALL)01/95]
Charging System Light
*
[LG02800(ALL)03/95]
This light, shown as a battery symbol on your cluster, indicates
that your battery is not being charged and that you need to
have the electrical system checked.
[LG02900(ALL)09/93]
6 pica art:0040054-A
Charging system light
[LG03000(ALL)01/93]
This light comes on every time you turn your ignition key to
the ON or START position. The light should go off when the
engine starts and the alternator begins to charge.
*
[LG03100(ALL)01/95]
If the light stays on or comes on when the engine is running,
have the electrical system checked as soon as possible.
%
*
[LG03200(ALL)02/95]
Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light
[LG03300(ALL)04/94]
The oil pressure light is represented by an oil can symbol. It
indicates the engine’s oil pressure, not oil level. However, if
your engine’s oil level is low, it could affect the oil pressure.
The oil can symbol will flash if the oil pressure drops below the
normal operating level. When you turn the key to the ON
position, the light will illuminate.
[LG03400(ALL)09/93]
6 pica art:0040060-A
Oil pressure light
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
74
[LG03500(ALL)04/94]
The light should turn off after a few seconds. If the light stays
on or illuminates when the engine is running — you have lost
oil pressure and continued operation will cause severe engine
damage.
[LG03550(ALL)02/95]
If you lose engine oil pressure:
[LG03600(ALL)02/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.
*
[LG03700(ALL)03/95] 2. Turn off the engine. If you do not stop the engine as soon as
safely possible, severe engine damage could result.
[LG03800(ALL)04/94] 3. Check the oil level following the instructions on checking
and adding engine oil in this owner guide. (See Engine oil in
the index.) Make sure your vehicle is on level ground.
[LG03900(ALL)01/93] 4. If the level is low, add as much oil as necessary before you
drive your vehicle again. Do not drive your vehicle if the oil
pressure light is on, even if the oil level is correct. For more
information about adding oil, see Engine oil, checking and
adding in the Index.
%
*
[LG04000(ALL)01/93]
Door Ajar Warning Light
*
[LG04100(ALL)08/94]
If the ignition switch is in the ON position and any door or the
liftgate is not completely closed, the light will illuminate.
[LG04200(ALL)09/93]
6 pica art:0040061-B
Door ajar warning light
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
75
[LG04300(ALL)01/93]
Cruise Indicator Light
[LG04400(ALL)01/93]
The CRUISE indicator light will illuminate when the speed
control system is activated.
[LG04500(ALL)09/93]
6 pica art:0040062-A
Cruise indicator light
[LG04600(ALL)01/93]
Overdrive Off Indicator Light
[LG04700(ALL)07/95]
If you choose to drive in the D (Drive) gear position instead of
in j (Overdrive), you can use the OVERDRIVE OFF/ON
button on the gearshift selector lever. When you drive with the
vehicle in the Overdrive Off position, the O/D OFF indicator
light will illuminate. The light also illuminates briefly when the
key is turned to the ON position.
[LG04800(ALL)09/93]
6 pica art:0040063-A
Overdrive off indicator light
[LG04900(ALL)01/93]
If the light flashes for about 8 seconds when the ignition is
turned to ON, it means the transaxle control unit received an
improper signal the last time the vehicle was operated. It may
be necessary to have your dealer check the transaxle.
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
76
%
*
[LG05800(ALL)07/93]
Low Fuel Light
[LG05900(ALL)01/93]
The low fuel light illuminates when the fuel sensor indicates
approximately 1/8 of a tank. It will remain illuminated until the
tank is filled with enough fuel to pass the 1/8 full level.
[LG06000(ALL)09/93]
6 pica art:0040058-A
Low fuel light
*
[LG06100(ALL)05/95]
Low Washer Fluid Light
[LG06200(ALL)01/93]
The low washer fluid light will remain illuminated when the
washer fluid sensor indicates that the washer fluid level is low.
[LG06300(ALL)09/93]
6 pica art:0040059-A
Low washer fluid light
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
77
*
[LG06400(ALL)01/95]
High Beam Light
*
[LG06500(ALL)03/95]
This light comes on when the headlamps are turned to high
beam or when you flash the lights.
[LG06600(ALL)09/93]
6 pica art:0040065-A
High beam light
*
[LG06700(ALL)03/95]
“Headlamps On” Alert Chime
[LG06800(ALL)01/93]
This chime will sound if you open the door while the
headlamps or parking lamps are on.
*
[LG06850(ALL)10/93] Gauges
*
[LG06900(ALL)01/95]
Fuel Gauge
[LG07000(ALL)07/93]
The fuel gauge displays approximately how much fuel you have
in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly
while the vehicle is in motion. This is the result of fuel
movement within the tank. An accurate reading may be
obtained when the vehicle is on smooth, level ground.
[LG07100(ALL)09/93]
7-1/2 pica art:0040056-A
Fuel gauge
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
78
*
[LG07200(ALL)01/95]
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
[LG07300(ALL)02/95]
This gauge is accompanied by a thermometer symbol. It will
show you the temperature of the engine coolant when the
ignition is in the ON position.
[LG07400(ALL)02/95]
As the engine warms up, the pointer will move to the
NORMAL band. When you are driving in heavy traffic or
experiencing stop-and-go conditions in hot weather, the pointer
may move to the very top of the normal band.
[LG07500(ALL)01/93]
Under any circumstances, if the pointer moves past the upper
limit of the NORMAL band, the engine is overheating and
engine damage may occur.
*
[LG07600(ALL)01/95]
If your engine overheats:
[LG07700(ALL)01/93] 1. Pull off the road as soon as it is safely possible.
*
[LG07800(ALL)03/95] 2. Turn off the engine. If you do not stop the engine as soon as
safely possible, severe engine damage could result.
*
[LG07900(ALL)05/95] 3. Let the engine cool. DO NOT REMOVE COOLANT
SYSTEM FILL CAP UNTIL THE ENGINE IS COOL.
[LG08000(ALL)02/95] 4. Check the coolant level following the instructions on
checking and adding coolant to your engine, see Engine
coolant in the Index. If you do not follow these instructions,
you or others could be injured.
*
[LG08100(ALL)05/92] 5. Add as much coolant as your engine needs. If the engine
continues to overheat, have the coolant system serviced.
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
79
[LG08300(ALL)09/93]
7-1/2 pica art:0040057-A
Engine coolant temperature gauge
*
[LG08400(ALL)01/95]
Speedometer
*
[LG08500(ALL)01/95]
The speedometer tells you how many miles (kilometers) per
hour your vehicle is moving.
*
[LG08600(ALL)01/95]
Odometer
*
[LG08700(ALL)01/93]
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been
driven.
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
80
%
*
[LG08800(ALL)11/94]
Trip Odometer
%
*
[LG08900(ALL)01/93]
The trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.
Before each trip, set the trip odometer to zero by pushing the
reset button.
[LG09000(ALL)09/93]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040069-B
Speedometer, odometer and trip odometer
*
[LG09100(ALL)02/95]
Tachometer
[LG09200(ALL)01/93]
The tachometer tells you how fast the engine is running by
indicating approximate engine revolutions per minute.
*
[LG09300(ALL)04/95]
Driving with the pointer in the red zone may cause engine damage.
[LG09350(ALL)06/96]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040400-A
Engine coolant temperature gauge
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
81
%
*
[LG09400(ALL)09/93] Electronic Cluster (If equipped)
[LG09500(ALL)04/95]
33-1/2 pica
art:0040064-I
Electronic cluster
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
82
[LG09600(ALL)01/93]
The electronic cluster has all of the same warning lights as the
mechanical cluster, however, some of the gauges will be
electronic instead of analog. In addition, the electronic cluster
has a fuel computer for measuring fuel economy, distance to
empty and outside air temperature.
*
[LG09700(ALL)01/95]
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
[LG09800(ALL)01/93]
This gauge shows you the temperature of the engine coolant
and is identified by a thermometer symbol. The letter H means
that the coolant is hot, C means that it is cold, and NORMAL
means that the coolant is within the normal operating range.
[LG09900(ALL)09/93]
The indicator bar on the graph will move into the normal
operating range as the engine warms up. When you are in
heavy traffic or stop-and-go driving in hot weather, the gauge
may read at the very top of the NORMAL range. This is
acceptable.
[LG10000(ALL)09/93]
However, if the indicator bar on the graph moves into the
H (hot) position, the engine is overheating and may cause
engine damage. If this happens, you should stop your vehicle as
soon as safely possible. Turn off the engine and let it cool.
Check the coolant level to be sure that it is at the proper level.
If your vehicle needs more coolant, see Engine coolant, checking
and adding in the Index and read the section regarding adding
coolant.
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
83
[LG10100(ALL)09/93]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040068-A
Engine coolant temperature gauge
*
[LG10200(ALL)01/95]
Fuel Gauge
[LG10300(ALL)01/93]
The fuel gauge displays approximately how much fuel you have
in the fuel tank. The number of bars illuminated in the display
indicates how much fuel is left. An accurate reading may be
obtained when the vehicle is on smooth, level ground.
[LG10350(ALL)09/93]
7-1/2 pica art:0040070-A
Fuel gauge
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
84
[LG10400(ALL)02/94]
Fuel and Distance Computer
[LG10500(ALL)09/93]
7-1/2 pica art:0040067-B
Fuel and distance computer
[LG10600(ALL)04/95]
The fuel and distance computer has five buttons to operate the
different functions.
% [LG10700(ALL)01/93]
SELECT — The SELECT button lets you choose the functions
of the fuel computer. Each time you press the SELECT
button, the computer advances to the next choice on the
menu. After it reaches the last choice on the menu, it returns
to the top of the menu.
[LG10800(ALL)01/93]
RESET — The RESET button is used to reset the Average
Economy function. Press the SELECT button until the
Average Economy function is displayed. Then press the
RESET button.
% [LG10900(ALL)04/94]
ENG/MET — The ENG/MET button allows you to change
your gauges from English to metric units or from metric to
English units. The displays remain in the units you choose
until you change them again, even after you turn off the
vehicle and start it again.
[LG11000(ALL)04/95]
TRIP/RST — The TRIP/RST button is used to reset the trip
odometer mileage. Press the OD/TRIP button until the trip
odometer mileage is displayed. Then press the TRIP/RST
button.
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
85
[LG11100(ALL)01/93]
OD/TRIP — The OD/TRIP button lets you switch the
display between the permanent odometer mileage and the
trip odometer mileage.
[LG11200(ALL)06/94]
Fuel computer functions
[LG11300(ALL)09/93]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040066-A
Fuel and distance computer display
[LG11400(ALL)01/93]
OUTSIDE TEMP
[LG11500(ALL)01/93]
This feature lets you display the temperature of the air outside
of your vehicle.
[LG11550(ALL)04/94]
The fuel and distance computer is designed to prevent
inaccurate temperature display readings. For example, a sudden
temperature change (such as driving out of a cool garage on a
warm day), may show outside temperature display readings
which are lower than expected. The accurate temperature will
be displayed after the vehicle has reached the outside
temperature and is driven at speeds of 30 mph (48 km/h) or
greater.
[LG11575(ALL)01/94]
In the event of a decrease in the outside air temperature, there
will be no delay in an accurate temperature display.
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
86
[LG11600(ALL)01/93]
INST ECONOMY
[LG11700(ALL)01/93]
Your instantaneous fuel economy is the fuel economy you get at
any particular moment. For example, you can see what your
fuel economy is in heavy traffic or on the highway.
[LG11800(ALL)01/93]
Factors such as braking, acceleration, and road terrain affect
your fuel economy.
[LG11900(ALL)01/93]
To display instantaneous fuel economy, press the SELECT
button until the menu displays INST ECONOMY. Your vehicle
must be moving for the computer to calculate a fuel economy
greater than zero.
[LG12000(ALL)01/93]
AVG ECONOMY
[LG12100(ALL)01/93]
The average fuel economy is an overall average of your fuel
economy taken from the last time the reset button was pushed.
The computer takes an average of all the types of driving you
have done since the RESET button was pressed (highway, city,
heavy traffic), and figures out the average fuel economy. You
can calculate your average fuel economy as often as you like.
For example, you can calculate the average fuel economy for
each tank of fuel or for every day.
[LG12200(ALL)01/93]
To display the average fuel economy:
[LG12300(ALL)01/93] 1. Press the SELECT button until the menu displays AVG
ECONOMY.
[LG12400(ALL)03/91] 2. You will probably display the average fuel economy for each
tank of fuel or for each trip you take. Each time you want to
recalculate the average fuel economy, you need to press the
RESET button. The average fuel economy must be displayed
to reset the fuel computer.
[LG12500(ALL)01/93]
The best time to reset the AVG ECONOMY is when you fill
the fuel tank or at the beginning of a trip.
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
87
[LG12600(ALL)01/93]
TO EMPTY
[LG12700(ALL)01/93]
The Distance to Empty function tells you approximately how
many miles or kilometers you can drive until you run out of
fuel.
[LG12800(ALL)01/93]
To see the Distance to Empty, press the SELECT button until
the menu displays TO EMPTY. The fuel computer displays
approximate distance to empty until you select another function.
[LG12900(ALL)07/94]
To ensure accuracy, turn the ignition to the OFF position when
you fill the fuel tank.
File:05vxlgn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:35:19 1996
89
Instrument Panel Controls
[IP01000(ALL)01/93] Instrument Panel
[IP01100(ALL)06/95]
33-1/2 pica art:0040084-F
Instrument panel
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
90
*
[IP01200(ALL)01/93]
The instrument panel (dashboard) on your vehicle is divided
into several different sections. Illustrations are provided for the
major parts of the instrument panel that are explained in this
chapter. Some items shown may not be on all vehicles.
[IP01300(ALL)06/95]
27-1/2 pica art:0040083-E
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
91
[IP01400(ALL)01/93]
The controls for the climate control systems, headlamps, clock,
radio, rear window washer and wiper, hazard flasher, power
switch, and speed control are all on the instrument panel.
*
[IP01500(ALL)01/93] Climate Control Systems
[IP01600(ALL)04/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040301-A
Climate control system panel
[IP01700(ALL)01/93]
Function Selector Buttons
[IP01800(ALL)01/93]
There are six function selector buttons: OFF, Mix, Defrost, Panel,
Panel/Floor, and Floor. When you press a function selector
button, the indicator light on the button will illuminate. If your
vehicle is equipped with a rear passenger compartment climate
control system, the instrument panel will also include a rear seat
function selector lever.
[IP01900(ALL)04/94]
■ The OFF button shuts off the air supply to all outlets and
stops all fan operations. Use this setting when driving
through an area where outside air is unpleasant or dusty.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
92
[IP02000(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
Operating with the function selector button in OFF or in
the recirculated air mode for extended periods of time in
cold weather can result in fog buildup on interior glass
surfaces. This fogging can make it difficult to see the
road for safe driving. Operating the system with outside
air (i.e., with the air intake selector button off) and with
one of the five function selector buttons selected (Defrost,
Mix, Floor, Panel/Floor, or Panel), will help prevent
fogging. Adjust the temperature as necessary for comfort.
[IP02100(ALL)06/95]
■ The Mix (P) button directs approximately equal amounts of
air to the windshield and floor outlets with a small amount
to the side windows.
[IP02200(ALL)06/95]
■ The Defrost (V) button directs air to the windshield with a
small amount going to the floor outlets.
[IP02300(ALL)06/95]
■ The Panel (Q) button directs air to the instrument panel
outlets.
[IP02400(ALL)06/95]
■ The Panel/Floor (S) button directs approximately equal
amounts of air to the instrument panel outlets and the floor
outlets.
[IP02500(ALL)06/95]
■ The Floor (R) button directs most of the system’s air
supply to the floor outlets with a small amount going to the
windshield and side window defrosters.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
93
[IP02600(ALL)01/93]
Air Outlets
[IP02700(ALL)01/93]
Air intake selector button
[IP02800(ALL)09/93]
The typical air intake selection is outside air. However, for
recirculated air, the air intake selector button may be activated.
When the air intake selector button is activated (indicator light
is on), it prevents the intake of outside air. This is the typical
selection when using the air conditioner (if equipped). It
recirculates interior air for faster cooling. The recirculated air
function also helps to prevent the intake of dusty or unpleasant
air.
[IP02900(ALL)01/93]
There are several air outlets on the instrument panel. There are
side outlets near the driver’s window and passenger’s window,
two center outlets, floor outlets, and windshield outlets. The
direction and amount of air flow from the center and side
instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for personal comfort.
[IP02950(ALL)04/94]
NOTE: Selection of the recirculated air mode under cold and
humid conditions may result in window fogging due
to entrapped humidity within the vehicle. To
counteract this circumstance, switch to the Defrost
mode and set fan speed to 3 or 4. Adjust air
temperature to a “warm” instead of “hot” setting.
[IP03000(ALL)06/95]
Heating Only System (Without air conditioning)
[IP03100(ALL)01/93]
You can heat and ventilate the inside of your vehicle, or defrost
the windshield with the function selector buttons, the fan speed
knob and the temperature control knob.
[IP03200(ALL)01/93]
An additional push-on/push-off air intake selector button
provides for the selection of recirculated inside air (button
lighted) or outside air (button not lighted).
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
94
*
[IP03300(ALL)06/95]
Turning on the heat
[IP03400(ALL)02/95]
Heat will be available when the engine has been running for a
sufficient time as indicated by the engine coolant temperature
gauge.
*
[IP03500(ALL)06/95]
To heat the inside of your vehicle:
[IP03600(ALL)01/93] 1. Press the function selector button for Floor.
[IP03700(ALL)04/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040302-A
Heating only climate control system panel
[IP03800(ALL)01/93] 2. Turn the temperature control knob toward the WARM (red)
area.
[IP03900(ALL)01/93] 3. Turn the fan speed knob to the speed of your choice. When
your vehicle warms up, you may want to set the fan speed
knob to a lower speed, or adjust the temperature control
knob to a lower setting to maintain a comfortable
temperature.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
95
*
[IP04000(ALL)10/93]
To defrost the windshield and side windows:
[IP04100(ALL)01/93]
■ Press the Defrost button, turn the temperature control knob
to the WARM (red) area and turn the fan speed knob to the
position of your choice. The recirculated air feature will be
automatically turned off in this setting (outside air will be
provided).
[IP04150(ALL)04/94]
■ To reduce window fogging under extreme conditions, select
defrost and high fan speed while reducing temperature to a
“warm” instead of “hot” setting. Slightly opening the rear
quarter windows may also help dry the interior window
surfaces.
*
[IP04200(ALL)10/93]
To heat and defrost at the same time:
[IP04300(ALL)01/93]
■ Press the Mix function selector button, turn the temperature
control knob and the fan speed knob to provide the
temperature and fan speed you prefer. The recirculated air
feature will be automatically turned off in this setting
(outside air will be provided).
[IP04600(ALL)06/94]
Controlling the Temperature in Your Vehicle
[IP04650(ALL)09/93]
■ To ventilate your vehicle with outside air, make sure that the
air intake selector button is set for outside air. Open the
instrument panel registers enough to provide the amount of
air desired for your comfort.
[IP04700(ALL)01/93]
■ To vary the temperature inside your vehicle, move the
temperature control knob toward WARM (red) for warmer
temperatures and toward COOL (blue) for cooler
temperatures. The temperature control knob setting
determines the temperature of the air being discharged from
the system in all operating modes (heating or A/C).
[IP04800(ALL)09/93]
■ Do not place objects under the front seats unless your
vehicle is equipped with an underseat storage compartment.
Improperly stored objects will interfere with the flow of air
to the back seats.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
96
[IP04900(ALL)01/93]
■ Remove any snow, ice, or leaves from the area below the
windshield on the outside of your vehicle. They could block
the air intake.
*
[IP05000(ALL)06/94]
Heating and Air Conditioning System (If equipped)
*
[IP05100(ALL)06/95]
Turning on the heat
[IP05200(ALL)01/93]
You can heat the inside of your vehicle and defrost the
windshield using the function selector buttons located in the
control assembly in the instrument panel.
[IP05300(ALL)07/95]
The six function selector buttons are: OFF, Mix (P), Defrost
( V) Panel (Q), Panel/Floor (S), and Floor (R). If your
vehicle is equipped with a rear seat climate control system, the
instrument panel will also include a rear seat climate control
lever. To turn on the rear passenger compartment control
system, select REAR, 1, 2, 3, or 4. With the lever set to REAR,
rear seat passengers will have control of rear fan speed on the
rear seat climate control panel. Positions 1, 2, 3, or 4 will control
rear fan speed from the front control panel. The temperature of
the air from the rear system is controlled by the rear passenger
compartment climate control system.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
97
[IP05400(ALL)04/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040301-A
Heating and air conditioning climate control system panel
[IP05500(ALL)09/93]
The standard heating system and the heating portion of the
heating and air conditioning system are essentially identical.
There is one exception, however; the air conditioning
compressor may automatically engage when the Defrost position
is selected to aid in defogging and defrosting the inside glass.
When Defrost is selected, the A/C compressor will
automatically operate when the outside temperature is above
approximately 40˚F (4˚C), whether or not the A/C button is
illuminated. Manual selection and illumination of the A/C
button in defrost mode does not override the automatic
compressor operation discussed above. Refer to the heating
system operating instructions covered previously for a more
detailed explanation of heating system operation.
[IP05600(ALL)01/93]
Turning on the air conditioner
*
[IP05700(ALL)09/93]
To cool your vehicle quickly in warm weather:
[IP05800(ALL)01/93] 1. Press one of the function selector buttons (typically Panel,
but Panel/Floor, Floor or Mix can be selected).
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
98
[IP05900(ALL)01/93] 2. Turn the temperature control knob to COOL.
[IP06000(ALL)01/93] 3. Press the A/C button. The indicator light on the A/C button
will illuminate.
[IP06100(ALL)09/93] 4. The air intake selector button may be in the outside air
mode or the recirculated air mode. The recirculated air mode
is recommended for best A/C performance when the vehicle
interior is very warm. As interior air comfort is reached, you
may decide to switch to the outside air mode.
[IP06200(ALL)01/93] 5. Turn the fan speed knob to the position of your choice.
[IP06300(ALL)01/93] 6. If your vehicle is equipped with the rear passenger
compartment air conditioning unit, it will be on when the
front A/C is on and the rear climate control lever is set to
REAR, 1, 2, 3, or 4. Refer to the previous section for an
explanation of the heating system.
[IP06400(ALL)01/93] 7. Adjust your instrument panel registers.
[IP06500(ALL)04/94] 8. If the inside of your vehicle is very warm, you may want to
drive for a few minutes with the windows down and the air
conditioner on. This forces most of the hot, stale air out of
the vehicle and allows the air conditioner to cool down the
interior more quickly.
*
[IP06600(ALL)05/95]
The air conditioner may be used to cool the outside air being
drawn into your vehicle, but using recirculated air is more
economical and cools your vehicle more quickly.
[IP06700(ALL)07/93]
NOTE: The A/C button independently toggles the A/C
system’s compressor signal and indicator light ON and
OFF in the Panel, Panel/Floor, Floor, Defrost and Mix
functions. The A/C button will not operate or light
when the system is set in the OFF position. The A/C
button will operate in defrost but will not override
previously discussed automatic operation.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
99
*
[IP06800(ALL)07/93]
Cooling your vehicle with outside air
[IP06900(ALL)01/93]
Cooling your vehicle with air conditioned outside air is quieter
but less economical than using recirculated air. It also has less
cooling capacity.
*
[IP07000(ALL)07/93]
To cool your vehicle using outside air:
[IP07100(ALL)04/95] 1. Turn the air intake selector button off (the outside air
position). The air conditioning unit directs outside air
through the instrument panel registers.
[IP07200(ALL)01/93] 2. Press one of the function selector buttons.
[IP07300(ALL)01/93] 3. Press the A/C button. The indicator light on the A/C button
will illuminate.
[IP07400(ALL)01/93] 4. Turn the temperature control knob to COOL.
[IP07500(ALL)01/93] 5. Turn the fan speed knob to the position of your choice.
[IP07600(ALL)04/95] 6. Make sure the registers in the instrument panel are open.
[IP07700(ALL)01/93]
During periods of high humidity, vapor may be emitted from
the air outlets when using the A/C with outside air. Correct
this by switching to recirculated air with the A/C button.
[IP07800(ALL)01/93]
Ventilating your vehicle with outside air
[IP07900(ALL)01/93]
In mild weather, you can ventilate your vehicle with outside air.
If the outside temperature is less than 70˚F (21˚C), you can add
cool air to your vehicle without using air conditioning. You will
get better fuel economy this way.
[IP08000(ALL)01/93]
The procedure for ventilating your vehicle with the standard
heating system or with the air conditioning system is the same.
Refer to the previous section for instructions on how to ventilate
with outside air.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
100
*
[IP08100(ALL)06/94]
Improving fuel economy
[IP08200(ALL)04/94]
Whenever you turn on the air conditioning, your vehicle uses
more fuel because the air conditioning compressor is running.
To get better fuel economy while cooling your vehicle, do not
use the air conditioner on mild days. Instead, set the air intake
selector button in the outside air position and turn the
temperature control knob to the COOL position.
*
[IP08300(ALL)04/95]
Operating tips
[IP08400(ALL)04/95]
When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather,
place the automatic transaxle gearshift selector lever in P (Park)
or in N (Neutral) to increase the engine idle speed. This aids in
engine cooling and air conditioner efficiency. If the engine
overheats, choose the outside air position and turn off the A/C
to stop the compressor for a short time.
*
[IP08500(ALL)10/93]
When your vehicle’s engine is operated at full throttle, the air
conditioner compressor will automatically be turned off to allow
maximum engine power. This may occur during passing or
when climbing steep grades. The compressor will return to
normal operation within a few seconds after full throttle is no
longer needed.
[IP08600(ALL)06/94]
NOTE: The compressor will not operate when the outside
temperature is less than about 40˚F (4˚C).
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
101
[IP10000(ALL)06/95]
Rear Passenger Compartment Climate Control System
for Vehicles with Non-Automatic Temperature Control
Systems (If equipped)
[IP10100(ALL)04/95]
If your vehicle is equipped with rear passenger compartment
climate controls, the rear seat occupants can select their own
personal climate comfort level.
[IP10150(ALL)04/95]
The rear seat climate control system is controlled from the main
climate control system on the instrument panel. If the main
system is off, the rear system will also be off. If the rear
passenger compartment climate control lever is set in OFF, the
rear climate controls are turned off. If the lever is set in any of
the fan speed positions (1-4), air will be discharged from the
rear seat vents at the corresponding speed. However, when the
lever is set at REAR, rear seat passengers can control their own
fan speed.
[IP10200(ALL)04/95]
The rear passenger compartment climate control system has a
fan speed knob which controls the speed at which air is
discharged from the vents. The vent selection switch determines
whether the air is discharged from the upper vents or the lower
(floor) vents. The temperature control knob controls the air
temperature.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
102
[IP10250(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040079-A
Rear seat climate control system panel
[IP10300(ALL)04/95]
NOTE: For maximum heating and cooling for front seat
passengers, set the rear fan switch to the OFF
position.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
103
[IP10305(ALL)06/95] Automatic Temperature Control System
[IP10310(ALL)06/95]
The control for your Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) is
located at the center of the instrument panel above the radio.
The ATC operates only when the ignition key is turned to the
ON position and the vehicle is running.
[IP10315(ALL)06/95]
17-1/2 pica art:0040072-E
[IP10320(ALL)06/95]
To turn the ATC on, push the AUTOMATIC button or any of
the five airflow function selector buttons: P, V, Q, S,
or R.
[IP10323(ALL)06/95]
To turn the ATC off, press the OFF button.
[IP10325(ALL)06/95]
To change the temperature in the display window, select any
temperature between 65˚F (18˚C) and 85˚F (29˚C) using the
N TEMP M button.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
104
[IP10330(ALL)06/95]
The ATC maintains the temperature you select and
automatically controls the airflow for your comfort. It also
allows you to override the automatic operation of airflow and
fan speed with manual function selector buttons and the fan
speed dial.
[IP10335(ALL)06/95]
When you select the AUTOMATIC button, the system
determines airflow location and fan speed automatically. It also
automatically determines whether you will be receiving fresh
outside airflow, recirculated interior airflow, or a combination of
both. You can manually override the airflow source (outside or
recirculated air) and airflow location by selecting one of the
function selector buttons. You can also manually override the
fan speed by rotating the fan speed dial.
[IP10340(ALL)06/95]
Whether you operate in the AUTOMATIC mode or manually
override the AUTOMATIC mode settings, the ATC will continue
to maintain the air temperature you have selected. However, if
you choose to manually override the airflow location by
selecting one of the function selector buttons, you will also need
to select the A/C button if you desire cool air-conditioned air.
(Your ATC automatically operates the air conditioning [if
required] when you are in the AUTOMATIC mode without
illuminating the A/C button, but the system requires you to
manually select the A/C button if you desire A/C operation
when you manually override airflow location.)
[IP10350(ALL)06/95]
If you want continuous maximum cooling, push the N side of
the TEMP button until 60˚F (16˚C) shows in the display
window. The ATC will cool at its maximum level and disregard
the 60˚F (16˚C) setting until a warmer temperature is selected. If
you want continuous maximum heating, push the M side of the
TEMP button until 90˚F (32˚C) shows in the display window.
The ATC will provide maximum heat regardless of the 90˚F
(32˚C) setting until a cooler temperature is selected.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
105
[IP10360(ALL)06/95]
The display window and the function selector buttons indicate
how the system is operating. The display window shows the
selected temperature and displays AUTO if you are operating in
the AUTOMATIC mode. If you override the automatic mode by
selecting any of the function selector buttons, AUTO no longer
appears in the display window and the appropriate function
selector button(s) illuminate. The display window also indicates
manual (thumbwheel) control of the fan speed when a
H
is
shown.
[IP10370(ALL)06/95]
Automatic Operation
[IP10380(ALL)06/95]
Push the AUTOMATIC button and select the desired
temperature. The selected temperature and AUTO appear in the
display window. The ATC heats or cools to achieve the set
temperature. It is important to note that if the ATC engages
your vehicle’s air-conditioning, it will do so automatically
without illuminating the A/C button.
[IP10390(ALL)06/95]
When in AUTOMATIC and weather conditions require heat, air
is sent to the floor. However, a feature is included in the ATC
to prevent blowing cold air to the floor if the engine coolant is
not warm enough to provide heating. Within three or four
minutes (of determining the engine coolant is not warm enough)
the fan speed gradually increases and airflow changes to the
floor.
[IP10400(ALL)06/95]
If specific conditions exist (such as window fogging) the five
override buttons allow specific airflow selection. The
thumbwheel allows you to adjust the fan speed to suit your
needs.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
106
[IP10410(ALL)06/95]
Temperature Selection
[IP10420(ALL)06/95]
The N TEMP M button on the left side of the control panel is
for temperature selection. The N side lowers the set
temperature, and the M side raises the set temperature. Press
and hold either side of the button to rapidly change the
temperature setting in one degree increments to either 65˚F
(18˚C) or 85˚F (29˚C). Then, the set temperature jumps 5˚F and
stops at either 60˚F (16˚C), which is maximum cooling, or 90˚F
(32˚C), which is maximum heating.
[IP10423(ALL)05/96]
Changing the Display Mode (English/Metric)
[IP10425(ALL)05/96]
To switch between the English and Metric display mode, press
the DEFROST and A/C buttons simultaneously while rotating
the fan speed dial upward until it stops moving. After one
second, the display will begin to toggle between English and
Metric.
[IP10430(ALL)06/95]
Fan Speed and Thumbwheel
[IP10440(ALL)06/95]
The ATC automatically adjusts the fan speed to the existing
conditions. To control the fan speed yourself, use the
thumbwheel located at the extreme right side of the ATC
control panel. Using the thumbwheel cancels the automatic fan
speed control, and causes a
H
to appear in the display window.
Rotate the thumbwheel up for HI speeds and down for LO
speeds.
[IP10450(ALL)06/95]
To return to auto fan control, press the AUTOMATIC button.
[IP10460(ALL)06/95]
Airflow Function Selector Buttons
[IP10470(ALL)06/95]
Your ATC has five buttons which allow you to make special
selections for airflow. The buttons are grouped in the middle of
the ATC panel and allow you to determine airflow location.
Pressing any of the function selector buttons illuminates the
button pushed and directs airflow to the appropriate location.
The temperature of the airflow will still be automatically
controlled. Return to fully automatic operation by pushing the
AUTOMATIC button.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
107
[IP10480(ALL)06/95]
P
[IP10490(ALL)06/95]
Push this button for airflow to the floor and windshield at the
same time. The P indicator light illuminates, and the display
window shows the set temperature. However, the air is not
cooled regardless of the temperature setting unless the A/C
button is pushed.
[IP10500(ALL)06/95]
V
[IP10510(ALL)06/95]
Press this button to obtain maximum airflow to the windshield.
Adjust the temperature setting as required for defrosting. The
V indicator light illuminates and the display window shows
the set temperature. When the outside temperature is about 50˚F
(10˚C) the air conditioning functions in order to dehumidify the
air to prevent window fogging.
[IP10520(ALL)06/95]
Q
[IP10530(ALL)06/95]
Push this button to select airflow through the instrument panel
registers. The Q indicator light illuminates and the display
window shows the set temperature. The ATC heats the air if the
selected temperature is warmer than the outside air coming into
the vehicle. However, the air is not cooled regardless of the
temperature setting unless the A/C button is pushed.
[IP10540(ALL)06/95]
S
[IP10550(ALL)06/95]
Push this button for air from the floor and instrument panel
registers at the same time. The S indicator light illuminates
and the display window shows the set temperature. The ATC
heats the air if the selected temperature is warmer than the
outside air coming into the vehicle. However, the air is not
cooled regardless of the temperature setting unless the A/C
button is pushed.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
108
[IP10560(ALL)06/95]
R
[IP10570(ALL)06/95]
Push this button to direct airflow to the floor. The R indicator
light illuminates and the display window shows the set
temperature. The ATC heats the air if the selected temperature
is warmer than the outside air coming into the vehicle.
However, the air is not cooled regardless of the temperature
setting unless the A/C button is pushed.
[IP10580(ALL)06/95]
Air Conditioning and Air Recirculation
[IP10590(ALL)06/95]
Activate the air conditioning in any of the function selector
override modes by pressing the A/C button. The A/C indicator
light on the button illuminates to verify activation, and cooled
air flows from the vents. Fan speed continues to be controlled
by the ATC unless the fan speed thumbwheel is used to
override the ATC.
[IP10600(ALL)06/95]
Press the M button to choose air recirculation. In this mode
the ATC system recirculates the air inside the vehicle rather
than drawing air from outside. Use this mode together with the
air conditioning to rapidly cool the inside of the vehicle or to
dehumidify the air inside the vehicle.
[IP10610(ALL)06/95]
Rear Passenger Compartment Climate Control System
with Front Passenger ATC
[IP10620(ALL)06/95]
If your vehicle is equipped with ATC, the rear passenger
compartment will also have climate controls so that rear seat
occupants can select their own personal climate comfort level.
[IP10630(ALL)06/95]
The rear seat climate control system is controlled from the main
ATC system on the instrument panel. If the front ATC system is
off, the rear system will also be off. Also, if the rear seat climate
control lever is set in OFF, the rear climate controls are turned
off.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
109
[IP10640(ALL)06/95]
If the rear seat climate control lever is set in any of the fan
speed positions (1-4), air will be discharged from the rear seat
vents at the corresponding speed. Rear seat passengers can
choose airflow to be distributed out of the upper or lower vents
by using the vent selection switch on the rear climate control
panel. The air temperature from the rear climate control system
will be automatically controlled by the front ATC system. Rear
seat passengers cannot control fan speed or air temperature by
using the temperature control knobs on the rear climate control
panel.
[IP10650(ALL)06/95]
If the rear seat climate control lever is set in the REAR position,
the front ATC system will not control the rear climate control
system. Rear seat passengers can control fan speed, upper or
lower air distribution, and temperature control from the rear
system by using the rear climate controls.
[IP10660(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040079-A
Rear seat climate control system panel
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
110
*
[IP10740(ALL)06/95] Liftgate Window Features
[IP10750(ALL)06/95]
Rear Window Defogger (If equipped)
*
[IP10760(ALL)06/95]
The defogger for the rear liftgate window clears frost, fog, or
thin ice from both the inside and outside of the rear window.
The defogger operates with the ignition in the ON position.
[IP10770(ALL)06/95]
If your vehicle is equipped with heated exterior mirrors, they
activate when the rear window defogger is switched on.
*
[IP10780(ALL)06/95]
The control switch is located on the instrument panel to the
right of the steering column.
[IP10790(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040073-E
Rear window defogger switch location
*
[IP10800(ALL)06/95]
Clear away any snow that is on the rear window and outside
rearview mirrors before using the defroster. With the engine
running, push the defroster button.
*
[IP10810(ALL)06/95]
After approximately 10 minutes, the defroster will turn off. If
the window or mirrors are still not clear, turn the defroster on
again.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
111
*
[IP10820(ALL)06/95]
The defroster will turn off when the ignition key is turned to
the OFF or START position.
*
[IP10830(ALL)06/95]
Never use sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners to
clean the inside of your rear window. If you do, you may
damage the wires that are bonded to the inside of the rear
window, and cause damage to the rear window defogger.
[IP10840(ALL)06/95]
Rear Wiper and Washer
[IP10850(ALL)04/95]
The controls for the rear wiper and washer can also be found
on the instrument panel to the right of the instrument cluster.
The rear wiper and washer controls operate with the ignition in
the ACC and ON positions.
[IP10900(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040080-D
Rear wiper and washer switch locations
[IP10950(ALL)04/95]
To turn on the rear wiper, press the RR WIPER switch. The
wiper will operate until it is turned off. The wiper will complete
one cycle every 10 to 15 seconds. To turn off the rear wiper,
press the RR WIPER switch a second time.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
112
[IP11000(ALL)04/95]
To activate the rear washer, press the RR WASH switch. For a
constant spray, hold the switch for a few seconds. For less
washer fluid, press the switch once and release it. When you
activate the washer, the wiper will cycle twice and then stop.
*
[IP11050(ALL)04/95]
Do not activate the washer for longer than fifteen seconds
continuously. This could damage the washer pump system.
*
[IP11100(ALL)04/95] Hazard Flasher Switch
*
[IP11150(ALL)04/95]
The hazard flasher is used to alert other drivers to hazardous
situations.
*
[IP11200(ALL)09/93]
The hazard flasher switch operates the same lamps as the turn
signal lever. When the hazard flasher is activated, all of these
lamps will flash on and off. The turn signal indicators cannot be
used when the hazard lamps are flashing. Operation of the
hazard flashers does not affect operation of the brakelamps.
*
[IP11300(ALL)12/93]
The flashers work even with the key out of the ignition. The
flashers will work for up to two hours when the battery is fully
charged and in good condition. They will not drain the battery
excessively. If the flashers run for longer than two hours or if
your battery is not fully charged, your battery may be drained
to the point where the vehicle will not start.
[IP11400(ALL)01/93]
The hazard flasher switch is located on the instrument panel to
the right of the instrument cluster.
*
[IP11500(ALL)09/93]
To use the hazard flasher:
*
[IP11600(ALL)02/94] 1. Push the HAZARD switch; you will see the turn signal
arrows flash.
*
[IP11700(ALL)09/93] 2. To stop the hazard flashers, push the HAZARD switch again.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
113
[IP11800(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040078-D
Hazard flasher switch location
[IP12100(ALL)01/93] Interior and Exterior Lights
*
[IP12200(ALL)01/94]
To turn on the headlamps, parking lamps, marker lamps, tail
lamps and instrument panel lights, use the headlamp control
knob, to the left of the instrument cluster.
*
[IP12300(ALL)01/93] 1. Turn the headlamp knob to the first position to turn on the
parking lamps, tail lamps, license plate lamps, marker lamps
and instrument panel lights.
*
[IP12400(ALL)05/95] 2. Turn the headlamp knob to the second position to turn on
the headlamps in addition to the parking lamps, tail lamps,
license plate lamps, marker lamps and instrument panel
lights.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
114
[IP12500(ALL)09/93]
13-1/2 pica art:0040074-E
The headlamp control knob
[IP12600(ALL)01/93]
A chime will sound if any of the exterior lamps are on when
the driver’s door is opened.
%
*
[IP12625(ALL)05/95]
Cleaning the Exterior Lamps
*
[IP12650(ALL)05/95]
Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solvents or abrasive
cleaners to clean the lamps, as these may cause scratches or
crack the lamps.
%
*
[IP12700(ALL)01/93]
Daytime Running Light (DRL) System
(Canadian vehicles only)
*
[IP12800(ALL)03/95]
The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system turns the high beam
headlamps on, with a reduced light output, when:
*
[IP12900(ALL)01/93]
■ the vehicle is “running”
*
[IP13000(ALL)01/93]
■ the vehicle has a fully released parking brake
*
[IP13100(ALL)01/93]
■ the headlamp system is in the OFF position
*
[IP13200(ALL)01/93]
NOTE: You may notice that the lights flicker when the engine
is turned on or off. This is a normal condition.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
115
*
[IP13300(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system will not
illuminate the tail lamps and parking lamps. Turn on
your headlamps at dusk. Failure to do so may result in a
collision.
*
[IP13400(ALL)01/93]
Lighting Up the Instrument Panel
[IP13500(ALL)01/93]
The instrument panel lights can be turned on by turning the
headlamp control knob to either the first or second position.
You can brighten or dim the instrument panel lights with the
DIM switch. The DIM switch is located near the headlamp
controls.
[IP13600(ALL)01/93]
Pushing and holding the right side of the switch will continue
to brighten the lights until the maximum brightness is reached.
Release the switch to maintain the desired brightness. The DIM
feature works similarly to dim the instrument panel lights when
the left side of the switch is pushed.
[IP13700(ALL)06/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0040076-B
The instrument panel brightness control
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
116
[IP13800(ALL)09/93]
Autolamp On/Off Delay System (If equipped)
*
[IP13900(ALL)02/95]
The autolamp sets the headlamps to turn on and off
automatically. You can use the autolamp to:
*
[IP14000(ALL)09/93]
■ turn on the headlamps automatically at night
*
[IP14100(ALL)09/93]
■ turn off the headlamps automatically during daylight
[IP14200(ALL)01/93]
■ keep the headlamps on for approximately three minutes after
you turn the key to OFF.
*
[IP14300(ALL)01/95]
To set the autolamp:
[IP14400(ALL)02/94] 1. Make sure the headlamp control knob is in the OFF position.
If the knob for the headlamps is on, the autolamp system is
canceled.
[IP14500(ALL)04/94] 2. Turn the ignition key to ON to start your vehicle.
[IP14600(ALL)01/93] 3. Use the autolamp thumbwheel to activate the autolamp
feature. It is located to the left of the instrument cluster. The
white mark indicates the approximate center of the
thumbwheel.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
117
[IP14700(ALL)09/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040077-B
Autolamp thumbwheel location
[IP14800(ALL)01/93] 4. Move the thumbwheel all the way to the right. The
autolamp will automatically turn the lamps on and off.
[IP14900(ALL)01/93]
NOTE: Be sure that you do not put anything on top of the
photodiode located in the top right side of the
instrument panel speaker grille. The photodiode
controls the autolamp; if it is covered, the photodiode
reacts as if it is nighttime, and the headlamps will be
illuminated.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
118
[IP15000(ALL)09/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040081-B
Autolamp photodiode location
[IP15100(ALL)01/93]
To turn the autolamp off, move the thumbwheel all the way to
the left.
[IP15200(ALL)04/95]
You can set the autolamp so the headlamps stay on for
approximately three minutes after you turn off your ignition.
The farther the thumbwheel is moved to the right, the longer
the headlamps stay on.
[IP15300(ALL)01/93]
The chime will sound when the autolamp system turns the
headlamps on and the driver’s door is open.
[IP15400(ALL)01/93]
Interior Lamps
[IP15500(ALL)07/93]
The front dome lamp is located overhead between the driver
and front passenger seats. However, if your vehicle is equipped
with a power sun roof, the dome lamp is located behind the
driver’s seat.
[IP15600(ALL)01/93]
The rear dome lamp is located overhead near the rear seating
positions.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
119
[IP15700(ALL)09/93]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040075-D
The dome lamp switch positions
[IP15800(ALL)07/93]
Either dome lamp will stay illuminated if the switch is pushed
to the ON position. The dome lamps will stay off if the switch
is pushed to the OFF position. When the switch is positioned to
the door/middle position, the dome lamps will come on when
either of the front doors or the sliding door is opened. The front
dome lamp, footwell lamps, and the sliding door step lamp
have a time delay feature and will gradually dim within about
15 seconds.
[IP15900(ALL)03/95]
The rear dome lamp also illuminates when the liftgate is opened
and goes off when it is closed. However, the rear dome lamp
will not remain lit in the ON position unless the ignition switch
is in the ON position. This feature is intended to help avoid a
run-down battery which can occur when a light is left on
unintentionally.
[IP15950(ALL)02/95]
If the vehicle doors are not fully closed and the interior lamps
remain illuminated, they will eventually turn off automatically
to prevent the battery from becoming discharged. Lamps that
illuminate when the front doors and the sliding door are open
will turn off after approximately 30 minutes. Lamps that are
illuminated when the liftgate is open will turn off after
approximately 60 minutes.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
120
*
[IP16000(ALL)04/95]
Illuminated Entry System (If equipped)
[IP16100(ALL)06/95]
If your vehicle is equipped with this option, the interior
courtesy lamps (footwell, stepwell, and dome lamps) will light
when either of the front doors or the sliding door is opened. If
you have the optional Keyless Entry System the lamps will also
light whenever any keypad or remote keyless entry transmitter
button is pressed. One of the stepwell lamps is located near the
sliding door entrance and there is one on each front door. The
footwell lamps are located below the instrument panel near the
driver’s and front passenger’s feet. When the liftgate is opened,
the optional liftgate lamp, rear dome lamp and sliding door
stepwell lamp are illuminated.
[IP16200(ALL)01/93]
The lamps that have the time delay feature will automatically
dim until they turn completely off approximately 15 seconds
after the doors are closed. When the key is placed in the
ignition and turned to the ON position, the lamps will turn off.
[IP16300(ALL)09/93]
Overhead Map Lamps (If equipped)
[IP16400(ALL)01/93]
The power sunroof overhead console also contains the overhead
map lamps.
[IP16500(ALL)09/93]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040082-A
The overhead map lamps
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
121
[IP16600(ALL)01/93]
You can turn the map lamps on and off by pressing the
switches next to the lamps.
*
[IP16700(ALL)05/95] Radio
[IP16800(ALL)04/94]
For information about the radio in your vehicle, refer to the
Electronic Sound Systems chapter in this owner guide.
[IP16901(ALL)09/93]
Clock Controls on Electronic Radios
[IP17000(ALL)04/94]
The electronic radios have a built-in clock. For complete
operating instructions, refer to the Electronic Sound Systems
chapter in this owner guide.
*
[IP17300(ALL)05/92]
Radio Antenna
*
[IP17400(ALL)07/93]
The fixed radio antenna is mounted on the front fender on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
*
[IP17500(ALL)04/95]
Power Antenna (If equipped)
[IP17600(ALL)09/93]
The power antenna is located on the front fender on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle. It will automatically raise when
the radio is turned on and lower when the radio is turned off.
*
[IP17700(ALL)04/95]
NOTE: The radio must be turned off so that the antenna will
retract prior to entering a car wash. Failure to retract
the antenna could result in damage to the antenna,
antenna base, or vehicle.
[IP17750(ALL)04/95]
Cleaning the Instrument Panel Lens
*
[IP17760(ALL)04/95]
Clean the instrument panel lens with a soft cloth and a glass
cleaner, such as Ford Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, or
equivalent. Do not use paper towel or any abrasive cleaner to
clean the lens as these may cause scratches.
File:06vxipn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:33:05 1996
123
Steering Column Controls
*
[SC00900(ALL)01/95]
The controls on the steering column and wheel are designed to
give you easy access to the controls while you are driving.
*
[SC01000(ALL)01/93] Turn Signal Lever
*
[SC01100(ALL)01/95]
You can use the turn signal lever on the left side of the steering
column to:
*
[SC01200(ALL)01/93]
■ operate the turn signals.
*
[SC01300(ALL)01/93]
■ turn the headlamps to high beam.
*
[SC01400(ALL)01/93]
■ flash the headlamps.
*
[SC01500(ALL)01/93]
■ turn the windshield wipers and washer on/off.
*
[SC01600(ALL)01/95]
Turn Signals
[SC01700(ALL)02/95]
Move the lever up to signal a right turn. Move it down to
signal a left turn. The corresponding indicator light in the
instrument cluster will flash.
*
[SC01900(ALL)11/93]
7-1/2 pica art:0040085-D
The turn signal lever
[SC02000(ALL)02/95]
If the turn signal stays on after you turn, move the lever back
to the center (off) position.
[SC02100(ALL)02/95]
For lane changes, move the lever far enough to signal but not to
latch. The lever will return to the off position when you release
it.
File:07vxscn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:47:35 1996
124
*
[SC02200(ALL)05/94]
If the turn indicator light in the instrument panel does not
illuminate or remains on (does not flash) when you signal a
turn, the turn signaling system is malfunctioning. Have this
condition corrected as soon as possible, and use the accepted
hand signals until the turn signal system is repaired.
[SC02225(ALL)01/93]
Cornering Lights
[SC02250(ALL)06/95]
Your vehicle is equipped with special cornering lights designed
to provide additional illumination toward the direction you are
turning. The corresponding light comes on when a turn is
signaled.
*
[SC02300(ALL)05/95]
High Beams and Flashing the Lamps
*
[SC02400(ALL)01/93]
To turn on the high beams, turn the headlamps on and push
the turn signal lever away from you until it latches. When the
high beams are on, the high beam indicator light on the
instrument panel is illuminated.
*
[SC02500(ALL)01/93]
To return to the low beam setting, pull the turn signal lever
toward you until it latches back into the neutral position. The
high beam indicator light turns off.
*
[SC02600(ALL)11/93]
7-1/2 pica art:0040086-D
High beam and flash-to-pass operation
*
[SC02800(ALL)01/93]
To flash the headlamps, pull the turn signal lever toward you
for a moment and then release it. The high beam headlamps
will flash whether the headlamps are on or off.
File:07vxscn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:47:35 1996
Steering Column Controls
125
*
[SC03100(ALL)03/95] Windshield Wipers and Washer
*
[SC03200(ALL)05/95]
Variable Interval Wipers
[SC03300(ALL)01/93]
Your vehicle has wipers that you can set to operate at varying
intervals. For example, you can set the interval so they wipe
less often in light rain or more often in heavier rain.
*
[SC03400(ALL)09/93]
10-1/2 pica art:0040087-E
Variable interval wiper control
*
[SC03500(ALL)01/93]
To set the interval wipers, rotate the knob at the end of the turn
signal lever to the most effective interval. The farther the knob
is from the OFF position, the faster the wipers move.
[SC03700(ALL)01/93]
To clean the windshield, push in the end of the knob on the
turn signal lever. For a constant spray, push and hold the end
of the knob. If the windshield wipers are off, they automatically
turn on for two wipe cycles after you squirt the washer fluid.
*
[SC03800(ALL)01/93]
Do not try to clean the windshield when the washer fluid
container is empty and never activate the washers for more than
fifteen seconds continuously. This could damage the washer
pump system.
File:07vxscn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:47:35 1996
126
*
[SC03900(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
In freezing weather, the washer solution may freeze on
the windshield and obscure your vision. Always warm
up the windshield with the defroster before you use the
washer fluid. If you cannot see through the windshield
clearly, it can increase the risk of being involved in a
collision.
*
[SC04000(ALL)04/95]
For information about refilling the washer fluid or replacing
your windshield wiper blades, see Windshield washer fluid and
Wipers in the Index.
*
[SC04100(ALL)01/93] Gearshift Lever
[SC04200(ALL)04/94]
The gearshift lever on your vehicle is mounted on the steering
column. On the end of the gearshift lever is the Overdrive
On/Off button. To learn about the operation of the gearshift
lever and the Overdrive On/Off button, see the Driving Your
Villager chapter.
[SC04300(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040092-D
Gearshift lever location
File:07vxscn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:47:35 1996
Steering Column Controls
127
[SC04700(ALL)05/95] Tilt Steering
[SC04850(ALL)02/95]
RWARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is
moving. You could lose control of the vehicle and injure
someone.
[SC04900(ALL)02/95]
17-1/2 pica art:0040089-E
Tilt release lever location
[SC05000(ALL)06/95]
To change the position of the steering column, pull the release
lever on the column down. Move the steering wheel to the
desired position and raise the lever to lock the steering wheel in
place.
File:07vxscn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:47:35 1996
128
*
[SC05600(ALL)03/91] Speed Control (If equipped)
[SC05603(ALL)02/95]
The speed control system allows your vehicle to maintain a set
speed above 30 mph (48 km/h) without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
[SC05605(ALL)01/93]
Avoid using the speed control when driving under the
following conditions:
[SC05610(ALL)07/93]
■ when it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed
[SC05620(ALL)07/93]
■ in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed
[SC05630(ALL)08/93]
■ on winding or hilly roads
[SC05640(ALL)07/93]
■ on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)
[SC05650(ALL)09/93]
■ in very windy areas
[SC05800(ALL)09/93]
To activate the speed control, push the main switch (CRUISE
CONT. ON); the switch is located in the group of controls to
the left of the steering wheel. The indicator light on the switch
will come on.
File:07vxscn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:47:35 1996
Steering Column Controls
129
[SC05900(ALL)09/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040091-B
Speed control main switch location
[SC06000(ALL)01/93]
Setting the Speed Control
[SC06100(ALL)04/95]
To set the speed control, accelerate your vehicle to the desired
speed (at least 30 mph [48 km/h]), push and release the
COAST/SET button on the left side of the steering wheel. The
CRUISE light in the instrument cluster will come on. Take your
foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set
speed.
File:07vxscn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:47:35 1996
130
[SC06200(ALL)06/95]
24 pica art:0040090-F
Speed control buttons on the steering wheel
File:07vxscn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:47:35 1996
Steering Column Controls
131
%
*
[SC06300(ALL)06/95]
Accelerating With the Speed Control Operating
[SC06400(ALL)01/93]
To pass another vehicle while the speed control is activated,
press the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the
vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
[SC06500(ALL)01/93]
Driving Uphill or on a Steep Grade
[SC06600(ALL)01/93]
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or
down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the speed
control.
[SC06700(ALL)07/93]
When driving uphill, especially with a heavy load, you may
notice your speed decreasing, even if you have the speed
control set. If the speed drops more than 8 mph (13 km/h), it is
normal for the automatic speed control feature to be cancelled.
You may need to help your vehicle maintain the selected speed
by driving without the speed control when driving up steep
grades.
[SC06800(ALL)01/93]
Cancelling the Speed Control
[SC06900(ALL)02/94]
To cancel the preset speed, follow one of these three methods:
[SC07000(ALL)04/95]
■ Push the CANCEL button on the left side of the steering
wheel; the CRUISE light will go out.
[SC07100(ALL)01/93]
■ Tap the brake pedal; the CRUISE light will go out.
[SC07200(ALL)09/93]
■ Press the main OFF switch to the left of the steering wheel.
Both the CRUISE CONT. ON switch indicator and the
CRUISE light in the instrument cluster will go out.
[SC07300(ALL)09/93]
If you unintentionally press the brake pedal while pushing the
RESUME/ACCEL button to reset the cruising speed, press the
OFF switch once and then reactivate the system by pressing the
CRUISE CONT. ON switch.
[SC07400(ALL)01/93]
The speed control will automatically be canceled if the vehicle
slows down below approximately 8 mph (13 km/h).
File:07vxscn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:47:35 1996
132
*
[SC07500(ALL)06/95]
Resetting the Speed Control
[SC07600(ALL)02/95]
To reset at a higher speed, use one of the following methods:
[SC07700(ALL)09/93]
■ Press the accelerator pedal. When the speedometer indicates
the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET button.
[SC07800(ALL)01/93]
■ Push and hold the RESUME/ACCEL button. When the
vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.
[SC07900(ALL)01/93]
■ Push, then quickly release the RESUME/ACCEL button. Each
time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
[SC08100(ALL)02/95]
To reset at a lower speed, use one of the following methods:
[SC08200(ALL)07/93]
■ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the speedometer indicates
the desired speed, push the COAST/SET button and release
it.
[SC08300(ALL)07/93]
■ Push and hold the COAST/SET button. Release the button
when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed.
[SC08400(ALL)07/93]
■ Push, then quickly release, the COAST/SET button. Each
time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
%
*
[SC08500(ALL)06/95]
Resuming a Set Speed
[SC08600(ALL)05/93]
To resume the preset speed, push and release the
RESUME/ACCEL button. The vehicle will resume the last set
speed as long as the vehicle is traveling at a speed over 30 mph
(48 km/h).
File:07vxscn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:47:35 1996
Steering Column Controls
133
[SC08700(ALL)09/93]
Information About the Speed Control System
[SC08800(ALL)01/93]
If the speed control system malfunctions, it will cancel
automatically. The CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster
will then blink to warn the driver.
[SC08900(ALL)01/93]
When the CRUISE indicator blinks, press the speed control OFF
switch and have the system checked by your Ford or
Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
[SC09000(ALL)09/93]
The CRUISE indicator light may blink if the CRUISE CONT.
ON switch is pressed while pushing the RESUME/ACCEL,
COAST/SET, or CANCEL buttons located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
File:07vxscn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:47:35 1996
135
Features
[FV01300(ALL)02/95]
Your vehicle has a variety of features designed for your
comfort, convenience and safety. Read this chapter to find out
about standard and optional features.
*
[FV01400(ALL)01/95] Doors
*
[FV01500(ALL)01/93]
For information on the liftgate refer to the Liftgate section later
in this chapter.
[FV01600(ALL)04/95]
Exterior Locks
[FV01700(ALL)04/95]
To unlock the door with the key, place the key in the door lock
cylinder and turn it toward the rear of the vehicle. To unlock all
the doors, turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle a second
time within 2-3 seconds (if equipped). To lock the door with the
key, turn it toward the front of the vehicle. Return the key to
the neutral position (straight up in the lock cylinder) to remove
it.
[FV01800(ALL)04/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040118-C
The exterior door lock — passenger side doors shown
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
136
[FV02200(ALL)01/93]
Automatic Door Lock
[FV02300(ALL)01/93]
If your vehicle is equipped with the optional power door locks,
locking the driver’s door with the key or with the manual
rocker switch will also lock all other doors. However, when the
driver’s door is unlocked, with the key or with the manual
rocker switch, other doors remain locked.
[FV02325(ALL)06/95]
Anti-Lockout
[FV02350(ALL)06/95]
Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lockout feature which
prevents the driver’s side door from being locked while the key
is in the ignition. To lock the driver’s side door, remove the key
from the ignition and then use either the manual rocker switch
or the door lock cylinder.
[FV02360(ALL)06/95]
Accessory Delay (If equipped)
[FV02370(ALL)06/95]
Accessory Delay is a feature that allows vehicles equipped with
power windows and the power sunroof to operate all power
windows and the power sunroof for 15 minutes after the
ignition is turned to OFF or until the driver’s door is opened
(after ignition is turned to OFF).
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
Features
137
*
[FV02400(ALL)01/93]
Sliding Door
*
[FV02500(ALL)01/93]
The sliding door allows rear seat passengers to enter and exit
easily.
[FV02600(ALL)09/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040122-B
The sliding door exterior lock
[FV02700(ALL)01/93]
To lock the sliding door, push the right side of the rocker
switch. To unlock the sliding door, push the left side of the
rocker switch.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
138
[FV02800(ALL)09/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040094-B
The sliding door interior lock
[FV02900(ALL)01/93]
To open the sliding door from inside or outside of the vehicle,
pull the handle toward the rear of the vehicle. The door will
stay open if you slide it all the way back until the catch at the
bottom of the door engages.
[FV03000(ALL)01/93]
To release the catch and close the door, pull the handle toward
the front of the vehicle. Be sure it is fully closed.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
Features
139
%
*
[FV03100(ALL)01/93]
Childproof Lock for the Sliding Door
%
*
[FV03200(ALL)01/93]
Your vehicle has a childproof lock for the sliding door. If you
set the childproof lock, the sliding door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle.
*
[FV03300(ALL)01/93]
This lock will keep children from opening the door from the
inside; the door can still be opened from the outside if the door
is unlocked.
[FV03400(ALL)09/93]
24 pica art:0040120-C
Childproof lock location
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
140
*
[FV03500(ALL)01/93]
To set the childproof lock:
*
[FV03600(ALL)01/93] 1. Open the sliding door.
[FV03700(ALL)01/93] 2. Find the childproof lock knob above the label.
[FV03800(ALL)01/93] 3. Pull the knob out.
*
[FV03900(ALL)03/95]
To release the childproof lock:
*
[FV04000(ALL)01/93] 1. Open the sliding door from the outside.
[FV04100(ALL)05/95] 2. Push the childproof lock knob in.
*
[FV04200(ALL)04/95]
Power Door Locks (If equipped)
[FV04300(ALL)05/95]
The power door lock control switches are located in the panels
of the front doors. They control the locks on both front doors,
the sliding door and the liftgate.
[FV04400(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040095-H
The power door lock switch
*
[FV04500(ALL)05/95]
NOTE: If the sliding door is open when all doors are locked
with the power door lock switch, the sliding door
automatically locks when it is closed.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
Features
141
*
[FV04600(ALL)01/93]
You can manually lock and unlock the doors using the manual
door locks to override the power locks.
[FV04700(ALL)09/93] Keyless Entry System (If equipped)
[FV04800(ALL)06/95]
If you have chosen the keyless entry system option for your
vehicle, you can lock or unlock the doors and liftgate without
using a key. The keypad is above the outside door handle on
the driver’s side. You can also use it to arm or disarm the
anti-theft system (if equipped). For more information on the
anti-theft system, refer to the Index.
[FV04900(ALL)09/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040096-C
The keyless entry system keypad
[FV05000(ALL)04/95]
The keypad will light when you push any of its buttons. In
addition, pushing any of the buttons will also activate the
illuminated entry system. For more information on the
illuminated entry system, refer to the Index.
*
[FV05100(ALL)01/93]
Do not push the keypad buttons with a key, ball-point pen,
pencil, or any other hard object since they could damage the
buttons.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
142
%
*
[FV05200(ALL)02/95]
Using the Keyless Entry System
*
[FV05300(ALL)02/95]
To operate the Keyless Entry System, you must be familiar with
the “personal code” and the “permanent code.” The personal
code is a code number that you select that is easy for you to
remember. This is the number that you enter on the keypad to
unlock the door. The personal code can be changed as often as
you like.
[FV05400(ALL)01/93]
The permanent code is a number that is assigned to your
vehicle. It does not unlock the door but is used to program
your personal code into the system. Once you have
programmed your personal code you will not need the
permanent code again until you wish to change your personal
code.
[FV05500(ALL)01/93]
The permanent code is taped to the computer module behind
the center console of your vehicle. It is also taped to your
Keyless Entry System Owner’s Card. For your convenience,
three additional pieces of tape with the permanent code have
been included in the glove box. Place these additional pieces of
tape in safe locations where you can refer to them when
necessary. Do not put them in any location that is accessible to
unauthorized persons, since this would allow them entrance to
your vehicle.
[FV05600(ALL)01/93]
Valid and Invalid Codes
[FV05700(ALL)01/93]
To help protect your vehicle from theft, certain codes that are
easily figured out cannot be registered for your personal code.
Some of the codes that cannot be registered for your personal
code include: the permanent code, five numbers consisting of
the same button, five consecutive numbers and a sequential
combination of numbers. The keyless entry system reads 1/2
and 9/0 as sequential numbers.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
Features
143
[FV05800(ALL)01/93]
The following numbers cannot be entered as a personal code:
[FV05900(ALL)01/93]
■ Any number containing digits that are all on the same
button. Example: 2-1-2-1-2
[FV06000(ALL)01/93]
■ Any number requiring sequential operation of the buttons.
Example: 1-3-5-7-0 or 7-5-3-1-9
[FV06100(ALL)04/95]
■ Any number with fewer than five digits or more than five
digits.
%
*
[FV06200(ALL)02/95]
Programming your Personal Code
*
[FV06300(ALL)02/95]
To program your own code:
[FV06400(ALL)01/93] 1. Enter the permanent code.
[FV06500(ALL)04/95] 2. A buzzer will sound for about six seconds or until your
five-digit personal code is entered.
[FV06600(ALL)01/93] 3. If you have programmed a valid number within five seconds
of entering the permanent code, the buzzer will sound for
about two seconds and the keypad light will shut off.
[FV06700(ALL)04/95] 4. Test your personal code to see if it has properly registered. If
it registered, any previously entered personal code has been
erased from memory.
[FV06800(ALL)04/95] 5. If you have successfully entered your personal code, the
driver’s door will unlock.
[FV06900(ALL)02/94]
If the personal code you entered did not work, it may be that
you entered an invalid personal code. See Valid and Invalid Codes
in the previous section to select a valid personal code.
[FV07000(ALL)01/93]
NOTE: If the battery is ever disconnected, the permanent
code and your personal code will be retained in
memory.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
144
[FV07100(ALL)01/93]
Changing Your Personal Code
[FV07200(ALL)01/93]
To change your personal code, simply repeat the steps for
entering your personal code using a new series of numbers; the
previous personal code will be erased and replaced by the new
code.
%
*
[FV07300(ALL)01/93]
Unlocking the Doors with the Keyless Entry System
[FV07400(ALL)01/93]
To unlock the driver’s door, simply enter your personal code.
[FV07500(ALL)05/93]
To unlock the passenger’s door and the sliding door, enter your
personal code and press the 3/4 button within five seconds.
[FV07600(ALL)07/93]
To unlock the liftgate, press the 5/6 button within five seconds
of unlocking the driver’s door.
[FV07700(ALL)01/93]
Locking the Doors
[FV07800(ALL)05/93]
To lock all of the doors, press the 7/8 and 9/10 buttons at the
same time. To prevent you from locking your keys in your
vehicle, this feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
It also will not operate if the front doors, sliding door or the
liftgate are open.
[FV07900(ALL)01/93]
Illuminated Entry System (Available with Keyless Entry
System)
[FV08000(ALL)04/95]
Refer to Entry system, illuminated in the Index for details.
[FV08010(ALL)06/95]
Remote Keyless Entry System (If equipped)
[FV08020(ALL)06/95]
Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote keyless entry
system. This option will allow you to open your vehicle using a
remote transmitter from distances of up to 49 feet (15 meters)
away. The remote feature will operate only when the ignition is
in the OFF position.
[FV08030(ALL)06/95]
The transmitter can unlock the driver’s door, unlock all doors,
lock all doors, and activate the vehicle’s anti-theft system (if
equipped).
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
Features
145
[FV08035(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040304-A
Remote keyless entry transmitter
[FV08040(ALL)06/95]
By pressing the UNLOCK button on the transmitter once, you
can unlock the driver side door. Pressing the UNLOCK button a
second time within six (6) seconds of unlocking the driver’s
door will unlock the other doors. The interior lamp will turn on
and stay on for thirty (30) seconds.
[FV08050(ALL)06/95]
By pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter once, all the
doors will lock, the parking lamps flash twice and the horn
chirps. When the LOCK button is pushed with all the doors
locked, the parking lamps flash twice and the horn chirps to
confirm that the doors are already locked.
[FV08060(ALL)06/95]
Using the Panic Alarm
[FV08070(ALL)06/95]
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may
activate the alarm to call attention to it.
[FV08080(ALL)06/95]
To activate the PANIC alarm, push and hold the PANIC button
on the remote for longer than 1.5 seconds. The horn will sound
and the headlamps and tail lights will flash for thirty (30)
seconds. To turn off the alarm, press the LOCK or UNLOCK
buttons or hold the PANIC button down for longer than 1.5
seconds.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
146
[FV08090(ALL)06/95]
Replacing the batteries
[FV08100(ALL)06/95]
The remote entry transmitter is powered by two coin type
Sanyo CR2016 3 volt batteries (included). If you notice a
significant decrease in operating range, the batteries should be
replaced. Replacement batteries can be purchased at most
pharmacies, watch stores or at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer.
[FV08110(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: The operating range of the remote entry system can
also be affected by weather conditions (such as very
cold temperatures) or structures around the vehicle
(buildings, other vehicles, radio and TV towers, etc.).
Typical operating range will allow you to be up to 49
feet (15 meters) away from your vehicle.
[FV08120(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040305-A
Replacing the batteries
[FV08130(ALL)06/95]
Remove the two batteries by snapping open the lid of the
remote transmitter. Replace the batteries with new ones as
shown in the above illustration. Close the lid securely. Press
both the LOCK and the UNLOCK button two or three times to
test the remote transmitter operation.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
Features
147
[FV08140(ALL)06/95]
If the batteries are removed for any reason other than
replacement, repeat the steps in Replacing the batteries to test
your remote transmitter(s).
[FV08150(ALL)06/95]
■ An improperly disposed battery can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.
[FV08160(ALL)06/95]
■ The remote transmitter is waterproof; however, if it does get
wet, immediately wipe it completely dry.
[FV08170(ALL)06/95]
■ The operational range of the remote transmitter extends to
approximately 49 feet (15 meters) from the vehicle. This
range may vary with conditions.
*
[FV08175(ALL)06/95]
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC
RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING
TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE
HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING
INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED
OPERATION.
[FV08180(ALL)06/95]
Replacement/Additional Transmitters
[FV08190(ALL)07/95]
In the event a transmitter is lost or an additional remote
transmitter needs to be set, you must change the ID code.
Follow the steps below to change the ID code of your system,
or return the remaining transmitter(s) to your dealer for
reprogramming of your remote entry system. This is necessary
to prevent unauthorized use of the lost transmitter.
[FV08200(ALL)06/95]
ID Code Programming Procedure
[FV08210(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: All transmitters must be programmed (or
reprogrammed) at the same time. If the programming
mode is entered and the transmitters are not
programmed (or reprogrammed) at the same time, they
will not operate with the system.
[FV08220(ALL)06/95] 1. Enter vehicle and close and lock all doors.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
148
[FV08230(ALL)06/95] 2. Insert and remove key from ignition six times within ten (10)
seconds. The instrument panel lights will flash twice.
[FV08240(ALL)06/95] 3. Turn ignition key to the ACC position.
[FV08250(ALL)06/95] 4. Press the LOCK button on the remote transmitter once.
[FV08260(ALL)06/95] 5. To enter additional remote controllers (including the
original), unlock, then lock the driver’s door using the power
door lock switch.
[FV08270(ALL)06/95] 6. Press the LOCK button on a new remote transmitter. The
instrument panel lights will flash twice, indicating code is
entered.
[FV08280(ALL)06/95] 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 as needed (up to four remote
transmitters may be programmed).
[FV08290(ALL)06/95] Anti-Theft System (If equipped)
[FV08300(ALL)06/95]
This system helps protect your vehicle against break-ins or theft
by monitoring all doors and the liftgate lock cylinder.
[FV08310(ALL)06/95]
When an unauthorized entry occurs, the system triggers and
will:
[FV08320(ALL)06/95]
■ flash the headlamps and hazard lamps
[FV08330(ALL)06/95]
■ honk the horn
[FV08340(ALL)06/95]
■ disable the starting circuit to prevent the vehicle from being
started
[FV08350(ALL)06/95]
To arm the system
[FV08360(ALL)06/95] 1. Remove the key from the ignition.
[FV08370(ALL)06/95] 2. Lock the doors by using either the power door lock switch
or by turning the key in either the driver or passenger door
lock cylinder. The parking lights will flash and the horn
chirps to let you know that the system has been armed. The
anti-theft indicator light on the right side of the steering
wheel will light and remain on.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
Features
149
[FV08375(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040329-A
Anti-theft indicator light
[FV08380(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a factory installed
keyless entry system or remote keyless entry system
(or both), the system can be armed by closing all the
doors and pressing the LOCK button on the remote
transmitter or by pressing the 7/8 and 9/10 buttons on
the keyless entry keypad.
[FV08390(ALL)06/95] 3. Close all doors. The anti-theft indicator light will stay on for
approximately 30 seconds and then flash once every 2.5
seconds.
[FV08400(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: Be sure to close all the doors completely. If the doors
are not completely closed, the alarm indicator light
will remain on steadily. The anti-theft system is
armed only when the anti-theft indicator light remains
on steadily for approximately 30 seconds after the last
door is closed, and then flashes every 2.5 seconds.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
150
[FV08410(ALL)06/95]
Disarming an untriggered anti-theft system
[FV08420(ALL)06/95]
Unlock either door with the door key or by pressing the
UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter (if
equipped) or by entering your personal code on the keyles entry
keypad (if equipped). This will disarm the system. When you
unlock the door with the key, make sure you fully rotate the
key in the lock. If you do not, the system may not disarm, and
will trigger when a door is opened.
[FV08430(ALL)06/95]
If the system is armed and you remain in your vehicle, simply
insert the key into the ignition and turn it to ACC. This disarms
the system and allows you to open the door to exit without
triggering the system. Remember to rearm the system by using
the power door lock, the remote transmitter (if equipped), or
the keyless entry keypad (if equipped) to lock the doors.
[FV08440(ALL)06/95]
The remote keyless entry system is designed to work with the
factory installed anti-theft system. It may not work with other
anti-theft systems.
[FV08450(ALL)06/95]
Triggering the anti-theft system
[FV08460(ALL)06/95]
The armed system will be triggered if:
[FV08470(ALL)06/95]
■ any door is opened without using the door key, the keyless
entry keypad (if equipped), or the remote keyless entry
transmitter (if equipped)
[FV08480(ALL)06/95]
■ the liftgate is opened or unlocked
[FV08490(ALL)06/95]
■ the hood is opened
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
Features
151
[FV08500(ALL)06/95]
Disarming a triggered anti-theft system
[FV08510(ALL)06/95]
The alarm can be disarmed by using one of the following
methods:
[FV08520(ALL)06/95]
■ unlocking the driver or passenger doors
[FV08530(ALL)06/95]
■ unlocking the doors using the keyless entry keypad (if
equipped) or with the remote keyless entry transmitter (if
equipped)
[FV08540(ALL)06/95]
■ putting the key in the ignition and turning it to the ACC
position
[FV08550(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: The flashing lights and honking horn will shut off
automatically within 2 minutes 30 seconds after the
system is triggered. It will trigger again if another
intrusion occurs. However, the starter circuit remains
disabled until the system is disarmed.
[FV08560(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: Both remote keyless entry systems will only operate
with the ignition in the OFF position.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
152
*
[FV08600(ALL)06/95] Liftgate
[FV08610(ALL)06/95]
Opening the Liftgate
[FV08620(ALL)06/95]
To unlock the liftgate with the key, insert the key into the lock
and turn it counterclockwise. To make the gate swing up to the
fully opened position, pull back and upward on the handle. The
liftgate will not unlock if the optional liftgate window is open.
[FV08630(ALL)06/95]
17-1/2 pica art:0040121-F
Opening the liftgate
[FV08640(ALL)06/95]
You can also unlock the liftgate using the optional power door
lock system, or the optional keyless entry system. However, it
cannot be opened until you release the latch by reaching under
the license plate light shield and lifting up on the handle.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
Features
153
[FV08670(ALL)06/95]
Opening the Liftgate Window (If equipped)
[FV08700(ALL)07/95]
To open the liftgate window only, turn the key clockwise. The
window unlatches and the rear wiper falls out of the way. Do
not force the wiper down by hand — it moves when the key is
turned. To close, push downward until it latches.
[FV08800(ALL)09/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040098-A
The liftgate window in the open position
[FV08900(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
Never drive the vehicle with the liftgate window open.
Dangerous exhaust fumes can be drawn into the vehicle
with the window raised and the vehicle moving.
[FV09000(ALL)01/93]
Closing the Liftgate
[FV09100(ALL)01/93]
To close the liftgate, reach up and pull the handle on the inner
trim panel downward.
[FV09200(ALL)01/93]
When you have pulled down the liftgate enough so that you
can reach the license plate light shield, push the shield down
and forward to close the liftgate. At this point, the liftgate is not
locked.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
154
[FV09300(ALL)01/93]
The liftgate has an intermediate and a fully closed position.
Make sure the liftgate is fully closed before you drive your
vehicle.
[FV09400(ALL)09/93]
24 pica art:0040099-D
Locking the liftgate using the lock lever
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
Features
155
[FV09500(ALL)01/93]
You can lock the liftgate by pushing in the lock lever before
you begin to close the liftgate. You can also lock the liftgate by
closing the liftgate, inserting your key and turning it clockwise
until you hear the lock lever engage. If you turn it too far, the
optional liftgate window will open. The liftgate can also be
locked with the optional power door locks.
[FV09600(ALL)01/93]
The liftgate area is intended only for cargo, not passengers. It
cannot be opened from inside the vehicle.
[FV09700(ALL)01/93]
After the lock lever is depressed, the liftgate must be unlocked
with the power door lock button or the key.
[FV09800(ALL)01/93]
NOTE: The lock lever will be on the right side of the lock
cylinder if your vehicle is equipped with the standard
liftgate glass. The lock lever will be on the left side
of the lock cylinder if your vehicle is equipped with
the optional flip-up liftgate window.
*
[FV09900(ALL)02/95] Windows
*
[FV10300(ALL)02/94]
Power Windows (If equipped)
[FV10400(ALL)04/95]
Each of the front doors has a power control that opens and
closes the window on that door. The driver’s door has master
controls that operate both front door windows. You must place
the ignition in the ON position to use your power window
controls. The driver’s power window controls include a lockout
button which prevents the operation of the passenger side
window from either the passenger or driver side controls.
[FV10500(ALL)06/95]
To open the window, press down on the switch; to close the
window, lift up on the switch.
*
[FV10600(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not let children play with the power windows. They
may seriously hurt themselves. Make sure occupants are
clear of the window(s) before closing.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
156
[FV10700(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica art:0040101-F
Driver side power window controls
[FV10800(ALL)01/93]
One-Touch-Down Power Window (Included with
optional power windows — driver side only)
[FV10900(ALL)06/95]
The one-touch-down power window feature allows you to
completely open the driver’s window without holding down the
window switch. To open the window completely, press the
switch down for about one second, then release it. If the switch
is momentarily lifted while the window is going down, the
window will stop at that position.
[FV11100(ALL)06/95]
To close the window you must lift and hold the switch until the
window closes.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
Features
157
*
[FV11200(ALL)01/93]
Manual Flip-Open Quarter Windows
[FV11300(ALL)01/93]
To open the flip-open quarter windows in the second or third
row, pull the rear portion of the latch toward you. Swing the
latch forward and out, then lock it into the open position by
pushing rearward until you hear a snap. To close the windows,
reverse the procedure.
[FV11400(ALL)09/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040102-A
Manual flip-open quarter window latch location
[FV11500(ALL)01/93]
NOTE: Optional third-row power windows must be opened
with the overhead console controls.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
158
*
[FV11600(ALL)09/93]
Power Quarter Windows (If equipped)
[FV11700(ALL)04/95]
The power quarter windows operate with the ignition in the
ON position. The power-operated quarter windows in the third
seat position are controlled by the RIGHT VENT and LEFT
VENT switches on the overhead console. Press the indented side
of the switch to open the windows; press the raised side of the
switch to close the windows.
[FV11800(ALL)09/93]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040123-B
Power quarter window switch
[FV11900(ALL)09/93]
Power Sunroof (If equipped)
[FV12000(ALL)01/93]
The power sunroof controls are found in the overhead console.
The power sunroof operates with the ignition in the ON
position.
[FV12100(ALL)09/93]
7-1/2 pica art:0040103-A
Power sunroof controls
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
Features
159
[FV12200(ALL)05/95]
To open the sunroof, press and hold the OPEN side of the
switch. Release the switch when the sunroof reaches the desired
position. To close the sunroof, press the CLOSE side of the
switch.
[FV12500(ALL)01/93]
When the sunroof panel is closed, you can raise the sunroof to
the vent position by pressing the UP side of the switch. To
lower the sunroof from the vent position, press the DOWN side
of the switch.
[FV12600(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
Do not let children play with the sunroof. They may
seriously hurt themselves.
[FV12700(ALL)04/95]
Remove any snow, water or other foreign matter from the
sunroof before you open it.
*
[FV12800(ALL)01/95]
Sliding Shade
[FV12900(ALL)04/95]
The sunroof has a sliding shade you can manually open or close
to block the sun when the glass panel is shut. To close the
sliding shade, pull the shade toward the front of the vehicle.
The shade automatically opens when the sunroof is opened.
*
[FV13000(ALL)01/95] Seats
*
[FV13020(ALL)04/95]
Head Restraints
*
[FV13030(ALL)04/95]
If you use them properly, head restraints will help protect your
head and neck in a collision.
[FV13040(ALL)09/93]
The head restraints can be adjusted in four positions: fully
raised, fully lowered and two intermediate positions. Press
down on the head restraint adjustment button and move the
restraint to the position that places the restraint directly behind
your head.
*
[FV13060(ALL)05/95]
A head restraint helps protect you best if you position it behind
your head and not behind your neck.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
160
[FV13080(ALL)09/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040136-A
The adjustable head restraint
[FV13100(ALL)06/94]
For more information on the seats in your vehicle, see the
Adjustable Rear Seating chapter in this owner guide.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
Features
161
[FV13200(ALL)01/93]
Adjusting the Front Seats Manually
[FV13300(ALL)01/93]
If you have manually adjustable front seats, you can move your
seat to a new position by lifting up on the seat adjustment lever
and sliding the seat to the position of your choice. The lever is
underneath the front of your seat.
[FV13400(ALL)09/93]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040119-B
Seat adjustment lever location
*
[FV13500(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
[FV13600(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
Luggage or other cargo should not be piled higher than
the seatbacks. Items can be thrown about and injure
people in an accident or sudden stop.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
162
[FV13700(ALL)01/93]
Reclining Seats
[FV13800(ALL)04/94]
You can tilt back the seats in your vehicle.
[FV13900(ALL)04/94]
RWARNING
All passengers riding in your vehicle should keep their
seatbacks in the upright position. Lap belts should be
snug and low across the hips. Failure to follow these
precautions can increase the risk of injury to the
abdomen and neck resulting from sliding under the
safety belts in a collision.
[FV14000(ALL)01/93]
To recline the seatbacks:
[FV14100(ALL)01/93] 1. Lift up the release lever and hold it up while you lean
against the back of the seat.
[FV14200(ALL)01/93] 2. When the seatback is tilted to the position you chose, release
the lever to lock the seatback in place.
[FV14300(ALL)01/93] 3. To return the seatback to its upright position, lift the lever
and lean forward.
[FV14400(ALL)09/93]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040104-B
Seatback release lever location
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
Features
163
[FV14500(ALL)09/93]
Using Power Seats (If equipped)
[FV14600(ALL)04/94]
If your vehicle has power front seats, you can adjust your seat
in several directions. The driver’s seat can be adjusted in six
directions and the passenger’s seat can be adjusted in four
directions. The controls are located on the side of the seat
closest to the door. The seat can be adjusted even without the
key in the ignition.
[FV14700(ALL)04/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040105-B
Six-way power seat controls location
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
164
[FV14900(ALL)06/95]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040125-C
Six-way power seat controls
[FV15000(ALL)09/93]
Power Lumbar Support (If equipped — driver’s seat)
[FV15100(ALL)01/93]
The controls for the driver’s seat power lumbar support are on
the side of the seat next to the door. This feature provides
built-in support for the driver’s lower back.
[FV15200(ALL)04/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040106-B
Power lumbar support controls location
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
Features
165
[FV15300(ALL)01/93]
To inflate the lumbar support pad, push the raised end of the
switch. To deflate the lumbar support pad, push the indented
end of the switch.
%
*
[FV15310(ALL)04/95]
Cleaning the Seats
*
[FV15320(ALL)05/95]
Leather
*
[FV15330(ALL)05/95]
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth.
For more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a leather and
vinyl cleaner or a mild soap.
%
*
[FV15340(ALL)04/95]
Fabric
*
[FV15350(ALL)05/95]
Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuum
cleaner. Remove fresh spots immediately. Follow the directions
that come with the cleaner.
*
[FV15360(ALL)04/95]
NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on a small, hidden
area of fabric. If the fabric’s color or texture is
adversely affected by a particular cleaner, do not use
it.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
166
*
[FV15400(ALL)01/95] Storage Compartments
*
[FV15500(ALL)09/93]
Underseat Storage Compartment (If equipped)
[FV15600(ALL)01/93]
The underseat storage compartment is located underneath the
front passenger seat. It can be opened by pulling it toward the
instrument panel.
[FV15700(ALL)02/95]
24 pica art:0040107-C
The underseat storage compartment
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
Features
167
[FV16100(ALL)02/95]
Coin Tray
[FV16200(ALL)02/95]
The slide-out coin tray is located in the instrument panel for
your convenience. It is located below the radio controls.
[FV16300(ALL)02/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040115-D
Coin tray
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
168
[FV16800(ALL)01/93]
Front Seat Cupholders
[FV16900(ALL)01/93]
The front seat cupholders are located on the side of the
passenger’s seat. Find the indented ledge and pull it down,
away from the side of the seat, toward the driver’s seat. When
the cupholder is not in use, push the cupholders into the cover
and lift the cover into its fully stored position.
[FV17000(ALL)02/95]
24 pica art:0040116-D
Using the front seat cupholders
*
[FV17100(ALL)06/94]
NOTE: Do not place heavy objects in the cupholders.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
Features
169
[FV17200(ALL)01/93]
Rear Seat Cupholders (available on some models)
[FV17300(ALL)04/94]
Your vehicle may also have rear seat cupholders built into the
side panels.
[FV17400(ALL)04/94]
RWARNING
Objects stored on the ledges below the rear side
windows can become dangerous projectiles during a
sudden stop or collision. Put small objects only in the
storage compartments.
[FV17425(ALL)06/95]
Third Row Seat Storage Compartment (If equipped)
[FV17450(ALL)06/95]
Your vehicle may come equipped with a folding
cupholder/storage tray/storage compartment built into the
passenger’s side of the third row seat. Find the indented ledge
on the right of the cupholder and pull it up to reveal the
storage compartment.
[FV17460(ALL)06/95]
Power Point Electrical Outlet (If equipped)
[FV17470(ALL)06/95]
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 12 volt power point
outlet located just below the rear seat audio controls. The power
point can be used in place of the cigarette lighter for optional
electrical accessories.
[FV17480(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: Do not plug the cigarette lighter into the power point
electrical outlet. Use the cigarette lighter.
*
[FV17500(ALL)01/95] Mirrors
*
[FV17600(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Make sure you can see clearly through the rearview
mirror at all times. Do not allow anything to block your
vision. If you can’t see through the mirror, you could be
involved in an accident and injure yourself or others.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
170
*
[FV18100(ALL)01/93]
Side View Mirrors
*
[FV18200(ALL)01/93]
Close your door and adjust the driver’s seat to the most
comfortable position before you adjust the side view mirrors.
*
[FV18400(ALL)12/93]
NOTE: Be careful. The convex side view mirror on the right
makes objects appear smaller and farther away than
they actually are. Use the inside rearview mirror (or
look behind you) to determine the actual size and
distance of objects that appear in the convex mirror.
*
[FV18500(ALL)09/93]
Dual Electric Remote Controlled Mirrors (If equipped)
[FV18600(ALL)01/93]
If you have power side view mirrors, you can adjust them in
any direction by using the mirror controls on the instrument
panel. This switch operates with the ignition in ON or ACC.
[FV18700(ALL)01/93]
The mirror control switch is on the instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
*
[FV18800(ALL)08/91]
To adjust the remote controlled side mirrors:
[FV18900(ALL)01/93] 1. Select the right or left mirror by rotating the selector switch
to R or L.
*
[FV19000(ALL)01/93] 2. Move the control knob in the direction you want to move
the mirror.
[FV19100(ALL)01/93] 3. Return the selector switch to the middle position to keep the
mirror in place.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
Features
171
[FV19200(ALL)02/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040110-D
Dual electric remote controlled mirrors switch
[FV19250(ALL)02/95]
Heated mirror feature (if equipped)
[FV19275(ALL)02/95]
Both power mirrors are heated whenever the rear window
defroster is turned on. Do not remove ice from the mirrors with
a scraper or you could damage them.
*
[FV20100(ALL)09/93] Cargo Net (If equipped)
*
[FV20200(ALL)01/93]
The cargo net is designed to hold your cargo upright between
the third row bench seat and the liftgate to prevent it from
moving around the cargo area.
*
[FV20300(ALL)05/95]
To install the cargo net:
*
[FV20400(ALL)01/93]
Attach the loops on the four corners of the net to the four
retainers on the cargo area rear quarter panels. Pull on the net
to be sure that it is fastened securely.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
172
*
[FV20500(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
Be sure to secure all four loops into the retainers. The
cargo restrained in the net must not exceed 50 lbs.
(22.5 kg) or the net may not stay secured.
*
[FV20600(ALL)01/93]
To remove the cargo net, remove the loops from the four
retainers.
[FV20700(ALL)09/93]
24 pica art:0040113-B
The rear cargo net
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
Features
173
*
[FV20800(ALL)09/93] Four Season Roof Rack (If equipped)
[FV20900(ALL)06/94]
Always load your luggage as far back as it will safely go on the
four season roof rack. Do not load more than 100 pounds
(45 kg). Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label (located on the
driver’s door pillar).
[FV21000(ALL)09/93]
7-1/2 pica art:0040114-D
The four season roof rack
[FV21100(ALL)01/93]
The front and rear cross-bars can be adjusted forward and
backward. Place your luggage between the bars, adjust the bars,
and secure the luggage with rope to the bars. There are also
adjustable loops on the side bars for the rope attachment.
[FV21200(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Be sure that items on the roof rack are securely fastened.
File:08vxfvn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:49:33 1996
175
Adjustable Rear Seating
[RR00900(ALL)04/94]
The removable and adjustable seats are a convenient feature of
your vehicle. Reading this chapter will help you learn about the
various ways the seats in your vehicle can be arranged to suit
your different needs.
[RR01000(ALL)05/96]
Your vehicle is a five or seven-passenger vehicle. As a
seven-passenger vehicle, it will have either a two-passenger
bench seat or two second-row bucket seats and the sliding
three-passenger bench seat in the third row. Read the section
that describes the type of second-row seat in your vehicle. To
make your vehicle a five-passenger vehicle, remove the
second-row seats.
[RR01100(ALL)01/93]
NOTE: When adjusting or moving any of the seats in your
vehicle, do not use any of the buckles, tongues, or
safety belt webbing to carry or move the seats. Lifting
the seats by any of the safety restraint equipment
could decrease their effectiveness.
[RR01200(ALL)04/94]
NOTE: Your vehicle has five different kinds of floor mats:
front seat mats, a cargo area mat, a sliding door area
mat, and second and third row passenger area mats.
Whenever you remove the mats to remove or adjust
any of the seats always remember that the mats must
be reinstalled before passengers ride in your vehicle.
The floor mats are specifically designed to keep
objects out of the seat tracks.
[RR01300(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
It is important to replace the floor mats whenever they
are removed for any reason. The floor mats are intended
to help prevent the possibility that high-heeled shoes
might become stuck in the seat tracks. Failure to replace
the floor mats might result in personal injury.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
176
*
[RR01400(ALL)01/93] Floor Mats
[RR01500(ALL)02/94]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040142-B
The removable floor mats
[RR01600(ALL)01/93]
Removable Floor Mats
[RR01700(ALL)06/94]
Whenever you remove the mats to remove or adjust any of the
seats, always remember that the mats must be reinstalled before
passengers ride in your vehicle. The floor mats are specifically
designed to keep objects out of the seat tracks.
[RR01800(ALL)01/93]
Be sure to keep the seat tracks clear of debris by cleaning them
periodically.
[RR01900(ALL)04/95]
Vacuum any particles from the inside of the tracks where the
roller units are enclosed using a small crevice tool attached to a
high-powered vacuum. This will ensure that the sliding seat will
continue to slide properly during the life of your vehicle.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
Adjustable Rear Seating
177
[RR02000(ALL)01/93]
Review the following illustrations so you will know the proper
way to place the floor mats with the various seating
arrangements available in your vehicle.
[RR02100(ALL)06/95]
27-1/2 pica
art:0040158-B
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
178
[RR02200(ALL)07/93]
33-1/2 pica
art:0040159-D
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
Adjustable Rear Seating
179
[RR02300(ALL)01/93]
NOTE: The step mat should be placed neatly in the cargo
area when not in use.
[RR02400(ALL)01/93]
Positioning pins are included with your floor mats to secure
them to the seat tracks. Push the positioning pins through the
plastic loops in the floor mats and into the seat tracks.
[RR02500(ALL)09/93]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040152-A
Floor mat positioning pin placement
[RR02600(ALL)01/93]
NOTE: Be sure to keep the seat tracks clear of debris by
cleaning them periodically with a high-powered
vacuum.
[RR02700(ALL)04/95] Head Restraints
*
[RR02750(ALL)02/95]
If you use them properly, head restraints are intended to help
protect your head and neck in a collision.
[RR02800(ALL)09/93]
The head restraints can be adjusted in four positions: fully
raised, fully lowered and two intermediate positions. Press
down on the head restraint adjustment button and move the
restraint to the position that places the restraint directly behind
your head.
*
[RR02900(ALL)05/95]
A head restraint helps protect you best if you position it behind
your head and not behind your neck.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
180
[RR02950(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the optional
two-passenger bench seat with built-in child seats, the
head restraints on the two-passenger bench seat are
not adjustable.
[RR03000(ALL)09/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040136-A
The adjustable head restraint
[RR03100(ALL)07/93]
It is not necessary to remove the head restraints from the seats
when removing seats from the vehicle. However, you can
remove the head restraints by pressing the adjustment button at
the base of the head restraint and pulling the head restraint
upward. Remember to replace them when the seat is
re-installed.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
Adjustable Rear Seating
181
[RR03200(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
The head restraints should be stored outside of the
vehicle (with the removed seat) to prevent them from
damaging the vehicle or injuring passengers in the case
of sudden braking or a collision.
% [RR03300(ALL)01/93] Two-Passenger Bench Seat
[RR03400(ALL)04/95]
NOTE: The two-passenger bench seat has a unique safety
restraint system. If your vehicle has the two-passenger
bench seat it is very important that the unique safety
belt system is used properly. Please read the section
in the Safety Restraints chapter that explains the
unique safety belt system and be sure you understand
it before anyone rides in the two-passenger bench
seat.
[RR03500(ALL)04/94]
If your vehicle has the second row two-passenger bench seat,
you can remove it if you need extra cargo space. With the
second-row seat removed, the third-row bench seat can be
moved up to a second-row seating or storage position for
additional rear cargo area room.
[RR03600(ALL)02/94]
To help prevent personal injury, at least two people are needed
to remove the seat.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
182
[RR03700(ALL)01/93]
Removing the Two-Passenger Bench Seat
[RR03800(ALL)04/94] 1. Remove the floor mats. Lift the seatback release lever and
fold down the back of the seat to the fully folded position.
[RR03900(ALL)09/93]
24 pica art:0040131-B
Seatback release lever location
[RR04000(ALL)01/93] 2. Detach the tongue from the auxiliary buckle on the side of
the seat.
[RR04100(ALL)01/93] 3. Lift up on the floor latch levers near the front seat legs and
release the seat legs from each anchor position.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
Adjustable Rear Seating
183
[RR04200(ALL)09/93]
24 pica art:0040147-B
The floor latch levers
[RR04300(ALL)01/93] 4. Place your hand under the seat cushion and tip the front of
the seat upward slightly. Slide the seat rearward to release
the seat from its anchor position.
[RR04400(ALL)01/93] 5. Two people should lift the seat and remove it from the
vehicle.
[RR04450(ALL)06/95] 6. Replace any floor mats that were removed.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
184
[RR04500(ALL)01/93]
If you decide to move the three-passenger bench seat forward to
the second row position, passengers riding in the seat will use
the second row safety belts.
[RR04600(ALL)04/95]
Installing the Two-Passenger Bench Seat
[RR04700(ALL)01/93]
To replace the bench seat in its original position:
[RR04800(ALL)06/95] 1. Make sure the area around the floor anchor positions is free
from obstruction.
[RR04900(ALL)01/93] 2. With the seatback folded down, two people should lift the
seat into the vehicle.
[RR05000(ALL)01/93] 3. Place the seat slightly behind the floor anchor positions and
catch the rear leg anchors into each anchor position.
[RR05100(ALL)01/93] 4. Press down on the front of the seat to secure the front legs
to the two floor latch locks. Place the seatback in the upright
position.
[RR05200(ALL)01/93] 5. Try to move the seat to be sure that it is securely fastened.
[RR05300(ALL)01/93] 6. Always reattach the tongue into the auxiliary buckle
mounted to the side of the seat.
[RR05400(ALL)01/93]
Labels have been provided on the side of the seat to remind
you of important safety precautions.
[RR05700(ALL)01/93] 7. Replace any floor mats that were removed.
[RR05800(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
Keep foreign objects out of the floor anchors. Objects in
the floor anchors could prevent front and rear seat legs
from engaging properly.
[RR05900(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
Before sitting in the removable seats, make sure that the
seat legs are securely attached by the floor anchors.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
Adjustable Rear Seating
185
*
[RR06000(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
[RR06100(ALL)09/93] Bucket Seats (If equipped)
[RR06200(ALL)01/93]
Quick-Release Bucket Seat
[RR06300(ALL)01/93]
The quick-release bucket seat option allows the bucket seat
nearest the sliding door to slide forward allowing easier entry
and exit to the third-row seats. Pull up on the seat adjustment
lever and slide the seat forward.
[RR06400(ALL)09/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040143-B
Seat adjustment lever location
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
186
[RR06500(ALL)06/93]
The quick-release bucket seat also has two levers on the back of
the seat — one to fold down the seatback and one to slide the
seat forward. These levers allow third-row passengers to enter
and exit more easily.
[RR06600(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040144-D
Quick-release bucket seat levers
[RR06700(ALL)01/93]
Removable Bucket Seats
[RR06800(ALL)04/94]
If your vehicle has second row bucket seats, you can remove
them if you need extra cargo space. With the second-row seats
removed, the third-row bench seat can be moved up to the
second row position for additional rear cargo area room. When
the third-row seat is moved to this position, passengers will use
the second-row safety belts.
[RR06900(ALL)02/94]
To help prevent personal injury, at least two people are needed
to remove the seats.
[RR07000(ALL)01/93]
Before you remove the seats, remove the floor mats. Then:
[RR07100(ALL)01/93] 1. Pull the seatback release lever up and tilt the back of the
seat forward as far as possible.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
Adjustable Rear Seating
187
[RR07200(ALL)09/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040145-B
Folding down the seatback
[RR07300(ALL)01/93] 2. Lift up on the two floor latch levers near the front seat legs
and release the seat legs from each anchor position.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
188
[RR07400(ALL)09/93]
24 pica art:0040128-C
Removing the quick-release bucket seat
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
Adjustable Rear Seating
189
[RR07500(ALL)02/94]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040146-B
The removable inside bucket seat
[RR07600(ALL)02/94] 3. Place your hand under the seat cushion and tip the front of
the seat upward slightly. Slide the seat rearward to release
the seat from its anchor position.
[RR07700(ALL)01/93] 4. Two people should lift the seat and remove it from the
vehicle.
[RR07800(ALL)01/93] 5. Replace any floor mats that were removed.
[RR07900(ALL)07/93]
NOTE: The bucket seats are not interchangeable due to the
locations of the floor latch levers. Each seat must be
reinstalled in its original position. In addition, the
seat behind the driver seat only has one arm rest.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
190
[RR08000(ALL)01/93]
Installing the Removable Bucket Seats
[RR08100(ALL)01/93]
To position the bucket seats back in their original positions:
[RR08200(ALL)06/95] 1. Make sure the area around the floor anchor positions is free
from obstruction.
[RR08300(ALL)01/93] 2. With the seatback folded down, two people should lift the
seat into the vehicle.
[RR08400(ALL)01/93] 3. Place the seat slightly behind the floor anchor positions and
catch the rear leg anchors into each anchor position.
[RR08500(ALL)01/93] 4. Press down on the front of the seat to secure the front legs
to the two floor latch locks. Place the seatback in the upright
position.
[RR08600(ALL)01/93] 5. Try to move the seat to be sure that it is securely fastened.
[RR08650(ALL)06/95] 6. Replace any floor mats that were removed.
[RR08700(ALL)01/93]
Labels have been provided on the side of the seats to remind
you of important safety precautions.
[RR09000(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
Keep foreign objects out of the floor anchors. Objects in
the floor anchors could prevent front and rear seat legs
from engaging properly.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
Adjustable Rear Seating
191
[RR09100(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
Before sitting in the removable seats, make sure that the
seat legs are securely attached by the floor anchors.
*
[RR09200(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
[RR09300(ALL)01/93] Three-Passenger Bench Seat
[RR09400(ALL)01/93]
When entering and exiting the vehicle, third-row passengers
must be careful that they step over the auxiliary safety restraint
system that is present with the second-row bench seat. Labels
are provided on the back of the second-row bench seat to
remind passengers to use care when exiting.
[RR09600(ALL)01/93]
The three-passenger bench seat can be positioned in any of five
positions along the seat track. Three of these positions are for
seating and two are storage positions to accommodate varying
cargo requirements.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
192
[RR09700(ALL)06/95]
Arranging the Seats for Maximum Cargo Space or
Passenger Seating Flexibility
[RR09800(ALL)01/93]
NOTE: When moving the three-passenger bench seat, the seat
cushion cannot be lowered unless the seat is in a
seating position. If you cannot get the seat cushion to
lower, you may have the seat in a storage position.
[RR09850(ALL)01/93]
NOTE: Before re-positioning seats, remove any floor mats that
may be in the way.
[RR09900(ALL)04/94]
Some of the different ways that your vehicle’s seats can be
arranged are shown below.
[RR10000(ALL)01/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040160-A
[RR10050(ALL)09/93]
NOTE: Do not try to remove the three-passenger sliding seat.
Removal of the third seat may negatively affect its
ability to slide properly.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
Adjustable Rear Seating
193
[RR10100(ALL)01/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040161-A
[RR10250(ALL)01/93]
With the second row seat(s) removed, the three-passenger bench
seat can be moved all the way forward, just behind the front
seats for more room in the cargo area.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
194
[RR10400(ALL)01/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040137-A
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
Adjustable Rear Seating
195
[RR10430(ALL)06/95]
Moving the Three-Passenger Bench Seat
[RR10450(ALL)01/93]
NOTE: When moving the three-passenger bench seat, the seat
cushion cannot be lowered unless the seat is in a
seating position. If you cannot get the seat cushion to
lower, you may have the seat in a storage position.
[RR10500(ALL)01/93]
The three-passenger bench seat is not removable, but it can be
moved to the second-row position when the second-row bucket
seats or second-row bench seat has been removed from the
vehicle.
[RR10600(ALL)09/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040148-A
The three-passenger bench seat slid forward
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
196
[RR10700(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
After moving the third-row seat, be sure to latch the seat
in a passenger seating position. Improper location of the
seat will prevent correct use of the safety belts and will
increase the risk of severe injury in an accident. After
sliding the seat, check that both sides of the seat are
locked securely by attempting to move each side of the
seat forward and backward. This must be done before
the vehicle is put into motion in order to prevent
unintended movement of the seat and potential passenger
injuries.
[RR10800(ALL)01/93]
NOTE: Before rearranging the seats, remove any floor mats
that might be in the way.
[RR10900(ALL)01/93]
The three-passenger seat can be stored behind the second-row
seat(s) to provide extra cargo space in the rear of the vehicle.
[RR11000(ALL)01/93]
With the second row seat(s) removed, the three-passenger bench
seat can be moved all the way forward, just behind the front
seats for more room in the cargo area.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
Adjustable Rear Seating
197
[RR11100(ALL)01/93]
To move the seat all the way forward:
[RR11200(ALL)01/93] 1. Lift up on the seat cushion release lever and fold up the seat
cushion.
[RR11300(ALL)06/95]
24 pica art:0040133-E
Seat cushion release lever location
[RR11500(ALL)06/95]
A label describing seat operation can be found underneath the
seat cushion.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
198
[RR11600(ALL)09/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040149-B
Seat cushion label location
[RR11900(ALL)01/93] 2. Lift up on the seat position release lever and hold while
sliding the seat along the seat tracks in the floor of the
vehicle.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
Adjustable Rear Seating
199
[RR12000(ALL)06/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040151-C
Sliding the three-passenger seat
[RR12100(ALL)01/93]
NOTE: When sliding the seat, be sure the middle belt tongue
and buckle are fastened. This will prevent the belt
from falling to the floor or becoming caught between
the seat cushion and the seatback. Keep the middle
seatbelt tongue and buckle fastened when not in use.
[RR12200(ALL)04/95] 3. Make sure the seat securely latches in the lock position of
both seat tracks before driving with the rear seat in this
position.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
200
[RR12300(ALL)09/93]
24 pica art:0040135-B
The three-passenger seat in the fully forward locked position
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
Adjustable Rear Seating
201
[RR12400(ALL)01/93] 4. Lower the seat cushion only if in a seating position. The seat
cushion will not lower in a storage position. Do not try to
lower the seat cushion by force because doing so could
damage the seat.
[RR12500(ALL)01/93] 5. Replace any floor mats that were removed.
[RR12600(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
Every time you adjust any seat, check to be sure that it is
properly latched in the lock position of both seat tracks.
If the seat is not properly latched, it could come loose
and increase the risk of severe injury or death in an
accident.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
202
[RR12700(ALL)09/93] Fold-Down Table-Top Seats (If equipped)
[RR12800(ALL)01/93]
The second and third row seats convert to table tops with
built-in cupholders. Lift up on the seatback release lever and
fold seatback forward.
[RR12900(ALL)09/93]
24 pica art:0040131-B
Seatback release lever location
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
Adjustable Rear Seating
203
[RR13000(ALL)09/93]
24 pica art:0040132-B
Table and built-in cupholders on the fold-down seatback
[RR13100(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
You should never place hard items such as coffee mugs
or drinking glasses on the table-top seats when the
vehicle is moving. Any item can become a projectile
inside a vehicle involved in a collision. To help prevent
personal injury, never leave loose items on the fold-down
table-top seats when the vehicle is moving.
File:09vxrrn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:46:49 1996
205
Electronic Sound Systems
[AS00850(ALL)06/95] Audio Systems
[AS00855(ALL)06/95]
Your vehicle has one of four audio systems depending upon
which options you selected.
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
206
[AS00857(ALL)06/95]
33-1/2 pica
art:0040310-C
Electronic AM/FM Stereo Cassette Radio
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
207
[AS00860(ALL)06/95]
33-1/2 pica
art:0040309-A
Premium Sound Radio
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
208
[AS00862(ALL)06/95]
33-1/2 pica
art:0040308-C
Premium Sound Radio — CD Compatible
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
209
[AS00865(ALL)06/95]
33-1/2 pica
art:0040307-C
Supersound with CD Player
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
210
[AS00875(ALL)03/93]
Radio Controls
[AS00900(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: The antenna will be in the up position when the
radio is playing and in the down position when the
radio is off or if a cassette or CD (if equipped with
CD changer) is playing.
*
[AS01500(ALL)06/95]
How to turn the radio on and off
[AS01600(ALL)06/95]
Press the VOL-PUSH ON knob or the “AM/FM” button to turn
on the radio. Press the “VOL-PUSH ON” knob again to turn it
off.
*
[AS01625(ALL)06/95]
How to adjust the volume
[AS01650(ALL)06/95]
Turn the “VOL-PUSH ON” knob to increase/decrease volume.
Bars illuminate in the display to show the relative volume level.
*
[AS01675(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: If the volume level is set above a certain listening
level when the ignition switch is turned off, when the
ignition switch is turned back on, the volume will
come back to a “nominal” listening level. However, if
the radio power is turned off, the volume will remain
in the position it was set at when radio power is
switched back on.
*
[AS01700(ALL)06/95]
Selecting the AM or FM frequency band
[AS01800(ALL)06/95]
Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired frequency band.
When in the radio mode, pushing the button more than once
will alternate between AM, FM1 and FM2. These functions are
used with the station memory buttons described under How to
tune radio stations.
%
*
[AS01900(ALL)05/95]
How to tune radio stations
[AS02000(ALL)06/95]
There are four ways for you to tune in to a particular station on
the radio. You can manually locate the station by using the
“TUNE” function, “SEEK” to the station, “SCAN” to the station
or select the station by using the memory buttons, which you
can set to any desired frequency.
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
211
[AS02100(ALL)06/95]
■ Using the “TUNE” button to select the tune function
[AS02200(ALL)06/95]
You can change the frequency up or down one increment at
a time (FM changes in increments of 200 kHz; AM changes
in increments of 10 kHz) by pressing the “TUNE” button. To
change frequencies quickly, press and hold down either the
right or left side of the “TUNE” button.
[AS02300(ALL)05/94]
Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcast
frequency, whether or not a station is present on that
frequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies later in this
chapter.)
*
[AS02400(ALL)04/95]
■ Using the “SEEK” function
*
[AS02500(ALL)06/95]
This feature on your radio allows you to automatically select
listenable stations up or down the frequency band. Press the
right (
a
) side of the “SEEK” button to select the next
listenable station up the frequency band. Press the left (
b
)
side of the button to select the next listenable station down
the frequency band. By holding the button down, listenable
stations can be passed over to reach the desired station.
[AS02600(ALL)06/95]
■ Using the “SCAN” button to scan radio stations
[AS02700(ALL)06/95]
Pressing the “SCAN” button once enters the scan mode by
stopping on each listenable station for a five-second
sampling. The radio band (AM/FM1/FM2) will blink to
indicate that the radio is scanning.
[AS02800(ALL)06/95]
To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled station
press the “SCAN” button again.
[AS03000(ALL)03/93]
Setting the station memory preset buttons
[AS03100(ALL)06/95]
Your radio is equipped with 6 station memory buttons. These
buttons can be used to select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12
FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2). Follow the easy steps
below to set these buttons to the desired frequencies:
*
[AS03200(ALL)06/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
212
*
[AS03400(ALL)06/95] 2. Press one of the memory preset buttons and hold the button
until the sound returns. That station is now held in memory
on that button.
*
[AS03500(ALL)06/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station memory preset
button you want to set.
[AS03550(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the Station
Memory Preset buttons will need to be reset.
[AS03600(ALL)06/95]
■ Using the Automatic Memory Store feature (Supersound
only)
[AS03900(ALL)06/95]
Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the “AUTO SET”
button once. Your radio will set the first six strong stations
of the band you are in (AM, FM1 or FM2) into the memory
buttons. The display will show “AUTO,” then run through
the frequencies, stopping momentarily on the stations being
set into the memory buttons. The radio is now in the
“AUTO” mode and this display will show “AUTO” each
time a preset selected by “AUTO SET” is activated.
*
[AS03950(ALL)06/95]
With Auto Memory Store, you can continually set strong
stations into your memory buttons without losing your
existing memory presets, which is especially handy while
traveling. Your radio will automatically set your memory
buttons to the strong local stations so you don’t have to
continually manually tune to existing stations.
*
[AS04000(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: If there are fewer than six strong stations in the
frequency band, the remaining unfilled buttons will
store the last strong station detected on the band.
*
[AS04100(ALL)05/95]
After all stations have been filled, the radio will begin
playing the station stored on memory button 1.
[AS04200(ALL)06/95]
To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode and return to
the manually-set memory button stations, simply push the
“AUTO SET” button. Display will show “AUTO” then
“OFF.”
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
213
[AS04450(ALL)06/95]
Using the “BASS” and “TREB” buttons to adjust the
tone balance and speaker output
[AS04475(ALL)06/95]
Push the top of the “BASS” button to increase the bass response
and push the bottom of the “BASS” button to decrease the bass
response. The display will show “BASS” and the volume
indicators will show the bass level.
[AS04750(ALL)06/95]
Push the top of the “TREB” button to increase the treble
response and push the bottom of the “TREB” button to decrease
the treble response.
[AS04900(ALL)03/93]
Adjusting Speakers
[AS05100(ALL)03/93]
Adjusting speaker balance
[AS05200(ALL)06/95]
Balance control allows you to adjust the sound distribution
between the right and left speakers. Push the top of the “BAL”
button to shift the sound to the right speakers, and push the
bottom of the “BAL” button to shift the sound to the left
speakers.
[AS05300(ALL)03/93]
Adjusting speaker fader
[AS05400(ALL)06/95]
Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distribution
between the front and rear speakers. Push the top of the
“FADE” button to shift the sound to the front speakers, and
push the bottom of the “FADE” button to shift the sound to the
rear speakers.
*
[AS05500(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show relative levels of
bass and treble, and positions of speaker balance and
fader functions (left to right, front to rear).
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
214
[AS10000(ALL)03/93]
Cassette Tape Player Controls
*
[AS10300(ALL)06/95]
How to insert a tape
[AS10400(ALL)06/95]
Your cassette tape player is equipped with power loading. Once
you insert a tape and push slightly (with the open edge to the
right), the loading mechanism draws the tape the rest of the
way in and play will begin after a momentary tape tightening
process.
[AS10500(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded with the ignition on
whether or not the radio power is on. Inserting a
cassette tape with the radio power off will turn the
audio system on. After the cassette is ejected, the
audio system will turn off. Also, the antenna will be
in the down position whenever the radio is not
playing (i.e., when a cassette or compact disc is
playing or when the radio power is off).
[AS10600(ALL)03/93]
How to locate a desired selection on the tape
[AS10700(ALL)05/94]
There are four ways to locate a desired selection on the tape.
You can use the fast forward, rewind, “SEEK” or “SCAN”
function. Following are brief descriptions of each.
[AS10800(ALL)05/94] 1. Fast forwarding the tape
[AS10900(ALL)06/95] To fast forward the tape, press the “FF” button. The “
X
”
display blinks while the tape fast forwards. The radio will
automatically begin playing until fast forward is manually
stopped (by pressing “FF” button) or the end of the tape is
reached. (At the end of the tape, the direction automatically
reverses and plays the other side of the tape.)
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
215
[AS11000(ALL)06/95] 2. Rewinding the tape
[AS11100(ALL)06/95] To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button. The “
X
”
display blinks while the tape rewinds. The radio will
automatically begin playing until rewind is manually
stopped (by pushing the “REW” button) or the beginning of
the tape is reached.
[AS11200(ALL)05/94] 3. Using the “SEEK” function with a cassette tape
[AS11300(ALL)06/95] While in the tape mode, push the right (
a
) side of the
“SEEK” button to seek forward to the next selection on the
tape. Push the left (
b
) side of the “SEEK” button to seek
the previous tape selection. The “TAPE” display blinks.
*
[AS11400(ALL)11/93]
NOTE: If you want to restart a currently playing tape
selection, press the left (
b
) side of the “SEEK” button
after three seconds into the current selection.
[AS11500(ALL)06/95] 4. Using the “SCAN” button to scan cassette selections
[AS11600(ALL)06/95] Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scan mode (display
blinks “SC”) to begin the forward scan mode on the tape
currently playing, stopping on each tape selection for a
five-second sampling.
[AS11650(ALL)06/95]
The scan mode continues to the other side of the tape after
one side of the tape has been played completely.
[AS11800(ALL)06/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled tape
selection, press the “SCAN” button again, or press “TAPE,”
“CD” (if equipped), “TUNE,” or “SEEK.”
[AS11900(ALL)03/93]
Reversing the direction
[AS12000(ALL)06/95]
The alternate track of the tape can be selected anytime by
pressing the “SIDE 1-2” button.
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
216
*
[AS12100(ALL)02/95]
How to eject the tape
[AS12200(ALL)06/95]
To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the “EJ” button.
The radio will resume playing if the radio power is on. The
tape cartridge can be ejected with radio power (and/or ignition)
on or off.
*
[AS12300(ALL)06/95]
How to store the tape
[AS12400(ALL)06/95]
Press the “AM/FM” button to stop the tape player and resume
radio play. Similarly, press the “CD” button to stop the tape
player and resume CD play. Also, pressing the “TAPE” button
while the tape is playing pauses tape play.
[AS12450(ALL)06/95]
The “
X
” symbol displays to indicate there is a tape in the
player. The symbol will be lit until you push the “TAPE” buton
to resume tape play.
[AS12500(ALL)03/93]
Using the Dolby B noise reduction feature
*
[AS12700(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured under license
from Dolby Labs Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and
double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
[AS12750(ALL)04/95]
Push the k button to activate Dolby B noise reduction. When
on, the k symbol will appear in the display.
[AS12800(ALL)03/93]
Tips on caring for your cassette player and tapes
*
[AS12900(ALL)02/95]
In order to keep your cassette tape player performing the way it
was meant to, read and follow these simple precautions:
*
[AS13000(ALL)02/95]
■ Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less should be
used. Tapes longer than 90 minutes are thinner and subject
to breakage or may jam the tape player mechanism.
*
[AS13100(ALL)02/95]
■ Protect cassettes from exposure to direct sunlight, high
humidity and extreme heat or cold. If they are exposed to
extreme conditions, allow them to reach a moderate
temperature before playing.
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
217
*
[AS13200(ALL)02/95]
■ Loose labels on cassette tapes can become lodged in the
mechanism. Remove any loose label material before inserting
a cassette.
*
[AS13300(ALL)02/95]
■ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it before playing
by putting your finger or a pencil into one of the holes and
turning the hub until the tape is tight.
[AS13400(ALL)03/93]
■ Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to clean the tape
player head after 10-12 hours of play will help maintain the
best playback sound and proper tape operation.
%
*
[AS29753(ALL)03/95]
Clock Operation
[AS29756(ALL)07/94]
How to View the Clock Mode
[AS29759(ALL)06/95]
Press the “CL” button to alternate the frequency/tape/CD (if
equipped) and time in the display. In the clock mode, pressing
any radio/tape/CD (if equipped) function will automatically
display the radio frequency/tape/CD (if equipped) for
approximately ten seconds before changing back to the clock
mode.
[AS29762(ALL)07/94]
How to Set the Clock
[AS29765(ALL)06/95] 1. Turn the ignition on (clock can be set when radio is on or
off).
[AS29768(ALL)06/95] 2. Press and hold in the “CLK” button, press the “SEEK”
button left (
b
) to advance the hours and right (
a
)to
advance the minutes.
[AS29771(ALL)03/93]
NOTE: The clock displays 12-hour time with no A.M./P.M.
indications.
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
218
[AS29800(ALL)06/95] Ford CD Changer (If equipped)
[AS29825(ALL)06/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040306-A
Ford CD Player
[AS29860(ALL)07/95]
The Ford Compact Disc Changer operates when the CD
compatible or Supersound Audio System is on and a magazine
with disc(s) is inserted. Handle the discs by their edges only. Be
sure to read and follow all of the care and cleaning instructions
under How to Take Care of and Clean Your CD Changer and Discs.
[AS29870(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: A CD magazine can be loaded with the ignition on
whether or not the radio power is on. Inserting a CD
magazine with the radio power off will turn the audio
system on. After the CD magazine is ejected, the
audio system will turn off. Also, the antenna will be
in the down position whenever the radio is not
playing (i.e., when a cassette or compact disc is
playing or when the radio power is off).
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
219
[AS29880(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: In some instances, the radio may have CD changer
controls, even if there is no CD changer.
[AS29905(ALL)06/95]
The digital display on the radio shows the disc and track
number. Indicators for compression on (“COMP”) and shuffle
on (“SHUFFLE”) are also in the display. These features are
described in more detail later in this chapter.
[AS29925(ALL)06/95]
Once a magazine is inserted, operation of the CD changer will
override that of the cassette player or radio.
[AS29940(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: The volume, bass, treble, balance, and fader controls
on the radio are also used with the CD changer.
[AS29960(ALL)06/95]
Slide the CD door all the way to the right. Insert the magazine
into the magazine opening. If a magazine is already loaded,
pressing “CD” will start CD play. For the first three seconds
after a disc starts playing, the radio display shows the disc
number (CD-01 for disc 1). From seconds four through six, the
track number is shown (TR-02 for track 2). For the remainder of
the track, the display shows the disc and track number (01-02
for disc 1, track 2).
[AS30100(ALL)06/95]
When the disc reaches the end, the disc changer automatically
goes to the beginning of the next disc and resumes playing.
[AS30120(ALL)06/95]
How to eject the CD magazine
[AS30140(ALL)06/95]
Press the eject button on the lower left of the CD changer to
eject the magazine whether or not the audio system is on.
[AS30300(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: If the ignition key is turned OFF during play and
then is set to the ON or ACCESSORY position, the
CD changer will resume playing in the mode
(radio/tape/CD) it was in when ignition was turned
off.
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
220
[AS30360(ALL)06/95]
How to locate a selection on your CD Changer using
Automatic Music Search
[AS30380(ALL)06/95]
Automatic Music Search allows you to quickly find a particular
selection on the selected disc. Press the left (
b
) side of the
“SEEK” button to locate a previous track or the right (
a
) side
of the “SEEK” button to locate a later selection.
[AS30405(ALL)06/95]
How to fast forward or rewind your CD Changer
[AS30425(ALL)06/95]
To quickly search for a particular point in a selection, press and
hold the “REW” button. Holding this button for more than
three seconds causes the CD mechanism to reverse at a faster
speed. The audio level will drop and the elapsed time will be
displayed during the fast reverse period.
[AS30445(ALL)06/95]
Pressing the “FF” button functions the same as the “REW”
button except in the opposite direction.
[AS30450(ALL)06/95]
Howtoswitchdiscs
[AS30465(ALL)06/95]
To switch discs while in the CD mode, press the “TUNE
DISCS” button. Press the left (
b
) side to play the previous disc.
Press the right (
a
) to play the next disc.
[AS30475(ALL)06/95]
When you have reached the end of the disc by keeping the fast
forward (“FF”) button pressed, the display will show the end
time of the last track and the sound will be muted. When the
fast forward (“FF”) button is released, the player resumes play
at the beginning of the first track.
*
[AS30550(ALL)04/95]
Using the “SCAN” function
[AS30575(ALL)06/95]
Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scan mode. The CD
changer will begin scanning the disc, stopping on each listenable
track for approximately a ten-second sampling. This continues
until you press the “SCAN” button a second time or eject the
disc. While in the scan mode, the track number flashes in the
display.
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
221
*
[AS30600(ALL)07/94]
Special Features of Your CD Player
[AS30650(ALL)07/94]
Compression
*
[AS30675(ALL)04/95]
The compression feature will bring soft and loud passages closer
together for a more consistent listening level.
[AS30700(ALL)06/95]
To turn the compression on, press the “COMP” button. When
on, the compression indicator (“C”) will appear in the display.
Press the button again to turn off.
[AS30750(ALL)07/94]
Shuffle
[AS30850(ALL)06/95]
Press the “SHUFFLE” button to turn on. Press it again to turn
off. When the shuffle mode is activated, the display will show
“SHF” for two seconds. When a new track is selected by the
shuffle feature, “SHF” will again be displayed for two seconds.
[AS30875(ALL)07/94]
Shuffle and Scan
[AS30900(ALL)06/95]
Both the shuffle and scan features can be activated
simultaneously. In this mode, the player will randomly pick a
selection and play the first ten seconds. This process is
continued until either the “SCAN” button or “SHUFFLE” button
is pressed a second time.
[AS31000(ALL)07/94]
How to Eject the Disc
[AS31050(ALL)06/95]
Push the eject button on the lower left corner of your CD
changer to stop play, eject the magazine and resume radio or
tape operation of your audio system.
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
222
[AS32100(ALL)06/95]
How to Take Care of and Clean Your CD Changer and
Discs
[AS32220(ALL)06/95]
To ensure the continued performance of your Ford Compact
Disc Changer, carefully read the following precautions:
*
[AS32230(ALL)04/95]
■ Always handle the disc by its edge. Never touch the playing
surface.
*
[AS32240(ALL)04/95]
■ Before playing, inspect the disc for any contamination. If
needed, clean the disc with an approved disc cleaner, such as
the DiscwasherH Compact Disc Cleaner or the Allsop 3H
Compact Disc Cleaner, by wiping from the center out to the
edges. Do not use a circular motion to clean.
*
[AS32250(ALL)04/95]
■ Do not clean discs with solvents such as benzine, thinner,
commercially available cleaners or antistatic spray intended
for analog records.
*
[AS32260(ALL)04/95]
■ Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or heat sources
such as defroster and floor heating ducts. Do not leave any
discs in a parked car in direct sunlight where there may be a
considerable rise in temperature or damage may result.
*
[AS32270(ALL)04/95]
■ After playing, store the disc in its case.
[AS32280(ALL)06/95]
■ If a disc has already been inserted, do not try to insert
another disc. Doing so may damage the disc changer.
[AS32290(ALL)06/95]
■ Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc
changer.
*
[AS32295(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
The laser beam used in the compact disc player is
harmful to the eyes. Do not attempt to disassemble the
case.
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
223
[AS32300(ALL)06/95] Common Operating Conditions of Your CD Changer
*
[AS32310(ALL)04/95]
The following information is designed to help you recognize
typical situations that could be mistakenly interpreted as
mechanical malfunctions of the disc player.
*
[AS32320(ALL)04/95]
■ A disc is already loaded.
*
[AS32325(ALL)04/95]
■ The disc is inserted with the label surface downward.
*
[AS32330(ALL)04/95]
■ The disc is dusty or defective.
[AS32340(ALL)11/92]
■ The player’s internal temperature is above 167˚F (75˚C).
Allow the player to cool off before operating.
[AS32345(ALL)06/95]
■ Different manufacturers of compact discs may product discs
with different dimensions or tolerances, some of which may
not be within industry standards or in accordance with the
CD format. Because of this, a new disc that is free of dust
and scratches could be defective and may not play on your
Ford Compact Disc Changer.
*
[AS32350(ALL)04/95]
If play does not begin after the CD button is pushed:
*
[AS32370(ALL)06/95]
■ Moisture may have condensed on the lenses within the unit.
If this occurs, remove the disc and wait approximately an
hour until the moisture evaporates.
*
[AS32380(ALL)04/95]
If the sound skips:
*
[AS32390(ALL)04/95]
■ Badly scratched discs or extremely rough roads will cause
the sound to skip. Skipping will not damage the disc player
or scratch the discs.
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
224
[AS32400(ALL)06/95]
Rear Seat Radio Control Operation
[AS32410(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040313-A
Rear seat radio controls
*
[AS32420(ALL)06/95]
How to turn the rear seat radio controls on and off
[AS32440(ALL)06/95]
Press memory preset buttons “3” and “5” simultaneously on the
face of your radio to turn the rear seat radio controls on. A
headphones symbol (j) will appear in the display when the
rear seat controls are on. Press “3” and “5” simultaneously
again to turn rear seat radio controls off.
*
[AS32460(ALL)06/95]
How to adjust the volume
[AS32480(ALL)06/95]
Press the right (R) side of the “VOLUME” rocker switch to
increase volume, and push the left (s) side to decrease the
volume of the rear speakers.
[AS32500(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: Rear seat control volume can be set no higher than
current radio setting.
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
225
[AS32520(ALL)06/95]
Using the “PROGRAM ADVANCE” button
[AS32540(ALL)06/95]
This button has different functions depending on the audio
source. In radio mode, pressing this button will cycle through
the memory presets for the given frequency band (AM, FM1,
FM2). In the cassette mode, pressing this button will change
tape sides. During the CD operation, this button will cycle
through the discs (one button push, one disc advance).
[AS32560(ALL)06/95]
Using the “SOURCE SELECT” button
[AS32580(ALL)06/95]
This button will cycle through all modes then begin to play. The
cycle order is as follows: AM, FM1, FM2, tape, CD (if
equipped).
[AS32600(ALL)06/95]
How to turn the speakers on and off
[AS32620(ALL)06/95]
When the rear seat controls are on, push the “SPKRS, ON-OFF”
button to turn all speakers off. Push again to turn all speakers
on.
[AS32640(ALL)06/95]
Using headphones with the rear seat controls
[AS32660(ALL)06/95]
Two 3.5mm headphone jacks have been provided on the rear
seat controls. Plug headphones into the provided jack(s) to
operate headphones. Note that the headphones can be used only
when the speakers are off.
[AS32680(ALL)06/95]
Using the “SEEK” button
[AS32700(ALL)06/95]
This button has different functions for each source (mode). In
radio mode, pressing “SEEK” proceeds to the previous or next
station. In cassette mode, this button is an Automatic Music
Search (AMS), moving to the next or previous selection on the
tape. In CD mode, this button moves to the beginning of the
next or previous track.
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
226
[AS32720(ALL)06/95] How to Use Your Steering Wheel Audio
Controls (If equipped)
[AS32740(ALL)06/95]
If your vehicle is equipped with steering wheel audio controls,
the controls are located on the inner right rim of the steering
wheel. These controls duplicate some of the audio functions.
[AS32760(ALL)06/95]
How to adjust volume
[AS32780(ALL)06/95]
Press the up arrow button (G) to increase the volume.
[AS32800(ALL)06/95]
Press the down arrow button (H) to decrease the volume.
[AS32820(ALL)06/95]
Using the “NEXT” button
[AS32840(ALL)06/95]
This control has different functions for each source (mode). In
the radio mode, the radio will cycle through the memory
presets for the given frequency band. In cassette mode, the tape
advances to the next selection. In CD mode, the CD will move
to the next track on the given disc.
*
[AS35200(ALL)06/95]
Common Radio Reception Conditions
[AS35300(ALL)03/93]
Several conditions affect FM reception and can result in noise or
interference in the reception. These are:
[AS35400(ALL)03/93]
Distance/Strength
[AS35500(ALL)05/94]
The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance
the signal must travel. The listenable range of an average FM
signal is approximately 25 miles (40 km). Beyond this distance,
the radio is operating in a “fringe” area and the signal becomes
weaker.
[AS35600(ALL)03/93]
Terrain
[AS35700(ALL)05/94]
The terrain (hills, mountains, tall buildings) of the area over
which the signal travels may prevent the FM signal from being
noise-free.
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
227
*
[AS35900(ALL)01/95]
If there is a building or large structure between the antenna and
station, some of the signal “bends” around the building, but
certain spots receive almost no signal. Moving out of the
“shadow” of the structure will allow the station to return to
normal.
[AS36000(ALL)05/95]
This condition exists when the radio waves are reflected off
objects or structures; the reflected signal cancels the normal
signal, causing the antenna to pick up noise and distortion.
Cancellation effects are most prominent in metropolitan areas,
but also can becomes quite severe in hilly terrain and depressed
roadways.
[AS36100(ALL)03/93]
To minimize the effects of these conditions, a stereo/mono
blend circuit has been incorporated into this system. This feature
automatically switches a weak stereo signal to a clearer
monaural signal, which improves the quality of reception.
*
[AS36200(ALL)01/95]
Several sources of static are normal conditions on AM
frequencies. These can be caused by power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms.
*
[AS36300(ALL)01/95]
Another reception phenomenon is Strong Signal Capture and
Overload. This can occur when listening to a weak station and
when passing another broadcast tower. The close station may
capture the more distant station, although the displayed
frequency does not change. While passing the tower, the station
may switch back and forth a few times before returning to the
original station.
*
[AS36400(ALL)01/95]
When several broadcast towers are present (common in
metropolitan areas) several stations may overload the receiver,
resulting in considerable station changing, mixing and
distortion.
*
[AS36500(ALL)01/95]
Automatic gain control circuitry for both AM and FM bands has
been incorporated into this system to reduce strong signal
capture and overload.
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
228
%
*
[AS36600(ALL)08/89] All About Radio Frequencies
[AS36700(ALL)06/95]
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the
Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
establish the frequencies that AM and FM radio stations may
use for their broadcasts. The allowable frequencies are: AM: 530,
540...1700, 1710 kHz in 10 kHz steps; FM: 87.9, 88.1...107.7, 107.9
MHz in 0.2 MHz steps.
[AS36800(ALL)03/93]
Not all frequencies will be assigned to a given area. This radio
will tune to each of these frequencies using manual tuning and
no fine tuning is necessary as radio stations may not use other
frequencies.
[AS36900(ALL)03/93]
Some FM radio stations advertise a “rounded-off” frequency
which is not the frequency on which they actually broadcast.
For example, a radio station that is assigned a frequency of 98.7
MHz may call itself “Radio 99” even though 99.0 MHz is not an
allowable FM broadcast frequency.
*
[AS37000(ALL)01/95] Important Warranty and Service Information
*
[AS37050(ALL)01/95]
About Your Warranty
[AS37100(ALL)03/93]
Your sound system is warranted for three years. Consult your
vehicle warranty booklet for further information.
*
[AS37150(ALL)01/95]
Servicing Your Audio System
[AS37200(ALL)03/93]
At Ford Audio, we stand behind our audio systems with a
comprehensive service and repair program. If anything should
go wrong with your Ford Audio System, return to your dealer
for service. There is a nationwide network of qualified Ford
authorized repair centers to service your problem.
File:10vxasn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 14:57:29 1996
229
Driving Your Villager
%
*
[DR01000(ALL)01/93] Automatic Transaxle Operation
*
[DR01100(ALL)01/95]
Putting Your Vehicle in Gear
*
[DR01200(ALL)04/95]
Your vehicle’s gearshift lever is on the steering column. The
OVERDRIVE OFF/ON button is located on the end of the
gearshift lever. You can put the gearshift lever in any one of
several positions.
[DR01300(ALL)06/95]
10-1/2 pica art:0040163-F
The steering column gearshift lever positions
*
[DR01400(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift
lever from position to position. If you do not hold the
brake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly
and injure someone.
*
[DR01500(ALL)01/93]
Once you place the gearshift lever securely into position,
gradually release the brake pedal and use the accelerator as
necessary.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
230
[DR01600(ALL)09/93]
Shift-lock Safety Feature
[DR01700(ALL)04/95]
Your vehicle has a special shift-lock safety feature which
prevents you from shifting out of P (Park) without the brake
pedal depressed. To shift the transaxle out of the P (Park)
position, the ignition must be in the ON position and your foot
must be pressing on the brake pedal.
*
[DR01800(ALL)04/95]
If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position
with the brake pedal depressed:
*
[DR01900(ALL)01/93] 1. Shut the engine off and remove the ignition key.
*
[DR02000(ALL)01/93] 2. Apply the parking brake.
*
[DR02100(ALL)01/93] 3. Reinsert the ignition key and turn it clockwise to the first
position (OFF).
*
[DR02200(ALL)04/95] 4. Depress the brake pedal, move the gearshift lever to N
(Neutral) and start the engine.
*
[DR02290(ALL)06/95]
If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using the alternate
procedure described above, it is possible that a fuse has blown
and that your brakelamps may also not be functional. Please
refer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Villager in this Owner
Guide for instructions on checking and replacing fuses.
*
[DR02300(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTIL YOU VERIFY
THAT THE BRAKELAMPS ARE WORKING.
%
*
[DR02500(ALL)06/92]
Backing Up
*
[DR02600(ALL)06/95]
Before shifting into or out of R (Reverse), you should always
come to a complete stop.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
Driving Your Villager
231
*
[DR02700(ALL)01/95]
Driving
[DR03000(ALL)06/95]
When to use D (Overdrive)
[DR03100(ALL)01/93]
Overdrive is the normal driving position. When the gearshift
lever is placed in (D) Overdrive, and the Overdrive Off button
has not been pressed, the vehicle will automatically upshift to
second, third and fourth gears. The transaxle will shift into the
correct gear when the right speed is reached.
%
*
[DR03200(ALL)06/95]
When to use D (Drive — with the Overdrive Off button
activated)
[DR03300(ALL)06/95]
You will notice that there is only one drive position on your
gearshift selection indicator (instead of Drive and Overdrive).
You will find a button labeled OVERDRIVE OFF/ON located on
the gearshift lever. Push in the button on the end of the lever
and the O/D OFF light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
With the O/D OFF light illuminated, the transaxle will operate
in first, second and third gears and will not shift into fourth
gear. Operating in Drive (O/D OFF) provides more engine
braking than Overdrive for descending hills, or city driving.
[DR03400(ALL)06/95]
6 pica art:0040164-C
The OVERDRIVE OFF/ON button
*
[DR03500(ALL)09/93]
To return the transaxle to the normal Overdrive operation, press
the OVERDRIVE OFF/ON button again. Use this button to
select Overdrive or Overdrive Off whenever you drive your
vehicle.
[DR03600(ALL)02/95]
NOTE: Overdrive will not engage until the engine has fully
warmed up.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
232
*
[DR03700(ALL)02/95]
The transaxle will be in the “overdrive on” mode when the
vehicle is started even if the O/D OFF mode was selected when
the vehicle was last shut off.
[DR03800(ALL)04/94]
If your vehicle is on an extremely slippery surface, the
Electronic Transaxle Control Module may receive a signal
indicating a rapid increase or decrease in wheel speed. If the
module detects this condition, it will limit the transaxle
operation to Third gear and Reverse. This reduces tire slippage
and protects the transaxle. The transaxle will operate normally
in Reverse, but will lack power during acceleration in Drive. If
this happens, stop your vehicle as soon as possible and turn the
ignition off for 3 seconds. Restart the vehicle. If the condition
still exists, contact your dealer as soon as possible.
*
[DR03900(ALL)04/95]
NOTE: If the O/D OFF indicator light is flashing on and off
repeatedly when the vehicle is started, there is a
transaxle electronic system malfunction. Contact your
dealer as soon as possible.
*
[DR04000(ALL)06/95]
When to use 2 (Second)
[DR04100(ALL)01/93]
Use Second (2) when driving on slippery roads or to provide
additional engine braking on downgrades. This position
provides Second gear operation only. Do not exceed 68 mph
(110 km/h) in this position.
*
[DR04200(ALL)06/95]
When to use 1 (First)
[DR04300(ALL)01/93]
Use First (1) to provide maximum engine braking on steep
downgrades. Upshifts from First can be made by manually
shifting to Second (2) or Overdrive (D). First (1) gear provides
only first gear operation. If you select First while driving at
higher speeds, the transaxle will shift to Second (2), and then
shift back to First (1) after the vehicle decelerates to the proper
speed. Do not exceed 35 mph (56 km/h) in this position.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
Driving Your Villager
233
[DR04320(ALL)06/95]
N (Neutral)
*
[DR04340(ALL)06/95]
In N (Neutral), the wheels of the transaxle are not locked. Your
vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline, unless the
parking brake or brakes are on.
*
[DR04400(ALL)06/92]
Parking
*
[DR04500(ALL)06/95]
Always come to a complete stop before you shift into P (Park).
This position locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels
from turning. To securely latch the gearshift in the P (Park)
position, pull it toward you, push it completely
counterclockwise against the stop, and then push it toward the
instrument panel.
[DR04600(ALL)01/93]
The gearshift is securely latched in Park (P) if you cannot rotate
it in a clockwise direction without lifting it toward you.
*
[DR04700(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).
*
[DR04800(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Never leave your vehicle unattended while it is running.
*
[DR05000(ALL)06/94]
Forced Downshifts
[DR05100(ALL)01/93]
To gain extra acceleration in Drive (D) (when passing another
vehicle) push the accelerator to the floor. The transaxle will
automatically downshift to the appropriate gear - third, second
or first.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
234
*
[DR05700(ALL)01/95] Steering Your Vehicle
*
[DR05800(ALL)01/93]
Your vehicle has power steering. Power steering uses energy
from the engine to help steer your vehicle.
%
*
[DR05850(ALL)04/95]
If the amount of effort needed to steer your vehicle changes at a
constant vehicle speed, have the power steering system checked.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is
turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more
effort.
*
[DR05900(ALL)01/93]
Never hold the steering wheel in the extreme right or left
position for more than five seconds if the engine is running.
This can damage the power steering pump.
*
[DR06100(ALL)01/93]
NOTE: After any severe impact such as striking large
potholes, sliding into curbs on icy roads, or a collision
involving the front end, have the front suspension
and steering checked for possible damage.
*
[DR06200(ALL)03/95] Brakes
*
[DR06300(ALL)01/93]
When the foot (service) brake pedal is depressed, the
high-mount brake lamp should illuminate.
*
[DR06400(ALL)01/93]
Front Disc Brakes
[DR06500(ALL)01/93]
The front disc brakes are self-adjusting. They do not require
service other than periodic lubrication of the caliper slide rails
and inspection for pad wear.
*
[DR06600(ALL)10/94]
Rear Drum Brakes
*
[DR06700(ALL)01/93]
The rear drum brakes are self-adjusting. Automatic adjustment
occurs through normal use of the brakes.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
Driving Your Villager
235
*
[DR06800(ALL)01/93]
Four-Wheel Anti-lock Brakes
*
[DR06900(ALL)01/94]
The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) prevents wheels from
completely locking up by automatically releasing and
re-applying the brakes. During ABS braking, slight brake pedal
pulsations may be felt on the driver’s foot. These pulsations
represent the rapid cycling of the ABS valves. The pedal
pulsations are considered normal ABS operation, and will stop
when normal braking is resumed or when the vehicle comes to
a stop.
%
*
[DR07000(ALL)12/93]
During ABS activation, a mechanical noise may be heard as the
ABS system cycles. This is normal ABS operation.
*
[DR07100(ALL)12/93]
The ABS system has self-check capabilities. The system turns on
the ABS warning light each time you start the engine. After the
engine is started and the ABS warning light turns off, the
system performs another test the first time the vehicle reaches
4 mph (6 km/h). A mechanical noise may be heard as the ABS
system performs a self test. This is a normal part of the self test
feature. If a malfunction is found during this check, the ABS
warning light will come on.
*
[DR07200(ALL)12/93]
You should always be careful when braking, even if your
vehicle has the ABS system. Heavy braking on roads with loose
surfaces such as snow or gravel, or roads with severe pavement
irregularities could also cause you to lose control of your
vehicle.
*
[DR07300(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
If the anti-lock brake system warning light remains on or
comes on while driving, have the braking system checked
by a qualified service technician as soon as possible.
*
[DR07310(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-lock system, and the brake
warning light is not lit, the anti-lock system is
disabled but normal brake function remains
operational.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
236
[DR07350(ALL)04/94]
Ford Motor Company has not found any negative effects of
mobile radio transmitting equipment installed on vehicles with
the ABS system providing that the radio is installed according
to the radio manufacturer’s instructions. However, if you have
had a mobile radio transmitter installed and the check ABS light
comes on (at any time other than immediately after turning the
key to the ON position) have your mobile radio dealer inspect
the installation. Also, if the ABS system is activated other than
during maximum braking, have your mobile radio installation
checked.
*
[DR07400(ALL)12/89]
If Brakes Do Not Grip Well or Pedal is “Low”
*
[DR07500(ALL)01/93]
If the brake pedal seems “low” it may indicate the need for a
brake system inspection and/or service. Apply your parking
brake several times. If the condition has not improved, you
should have your brakes checked as soon as possible.
%
*
[DR07600(ALL)01/93]
Occasional brake squeal during light to moderate stops does not
affect the function of the brake system and is normal. However,
if the squeal becomes very loud or if it becomes more frequent,
return the vehicle to your dealer for inspection.
*
[DR07700(ALL)11/89]
RWARNING
Modifications to the suspension spring rates and/or
vehicle ride height may adversely affect vehicle stopping
ability.
%
*
[DR07800(ALL)01/93]
Stopping Distances
*
[DR07900(ALL)01/93]
Stopping distances vary with different loads and driving
conditions. Use caution when you drive under new conditions
and acquaint yourself with your vehicle’s performance.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
Driving Your Villager
237
%
*
[DR08000(ALL)01/95]
Applying the Brakes
[DR08100(ALL)06/94]
Apply the brake pedal evenly. Use the “squeeze” technique.
Push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing force. This
allows the wheels to continue to roll while you are slowing
down, which lets you steer properly. In the event of a sudden
stop, do not pump the brakes. Pumping the brakes during an
anti-lock stop will diminish braking effectiveness.
*
[DR08200(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal.
This will increase your vehicle’s stopping distance and
may also cause brake damage.
*
[DR08300(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a
lower gear. Do not apply your brakes continuously, as
they may overheat and become less effective.
*
[DR08400(ALL)03/95] Using the Parking Brake
[DR08500(ALL)02/94]
The parking brake pedal is suspended just below the bottom of
the instrument panel to the left of the brake pedal. To set the
parking brake, press the brake pedal with your right foot and
hold it while you push the parking brake pedal down firmly
with your left foot.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
238
[DR08600(ALL)06/94]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040281-A
The parking brake
*
[DR08700(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
When parking, do not use the gearshift in place of the
parking brake. Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in Park
(P). Turn off the ignition whenever you leave your
vehicle. Never leave your vehicle unattended while it is
running. If you do not take these precautions, your
vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone.
[DR08800(ALL)02/94]
To release the parking brake, press the brake pedal with your
right foot and hold it while you lift up on the parking brake
release handle.
*
[DR08900(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
If the parking brake is fully released, but the Brake
System light remains on, have the brakes checked
immediately. They may not be working properly.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
Driving Your Villager
239
*
[DR09000(ALL)02/94]
The parking brake is not designed to stop a moving vehicle, but
you can use the parking brake to stop your vehicle in an
emergency if the service brakes fail. However, since the parking
brake does not stop your vehicle as quickly as the normal
brakes, the stopping distance will increase greatly.
%
*
[DR09100(ALL)01/95] Driving Under Special Conditions
*
[DR09200(ALL)01/95]
Tips for Safe Driving
*
[DR09300(ALL)01/93]
As with any new vehicle, yours may drive and handle
differently from your previous vehicle. Use greater care until
you become accustomed to its features and driving
characteristics.
*
[DR09400(ALL)01/93]
Always operate your vehicle within reasonable limits. Abrupt
changes in acceleration, deceleration, turning, or combinations of
these maneuvers can cause a vehicle to behave differently than
anticipated, especially when road conditions vary.
*
[DR09500(ALL)07/93]
For example, even with anti-lock brakes, extreme braking can
make it difficult to control the direction of the vehicle. Use a
“squeeze” technique. Push on the brake pedal with steadily
increasing force. This allows the wheels to brake, yet continue to
roll so that you may steer in the direction you want to travel.
*
[DR09600(ALL)01/93]
If you release the accelerator abruptly or brake hard while
going too fast around a severe curve, your vehicle may change
its direction of travel. Avoid applying the brakes, if possible. If
you must apply the brakes, use the “squeeze” technique
described earlier.
[DR09650(ALL)07/93]
If you run off the road, do not turn the steering wheel sharply
to return to the road. Instead, slow the vehicle sufficiently and
gradually steer the vehicle back onto the road.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
240
%
*
[DR09900(ALL)01/93]
Driving at High Speeds
*
[DR09990(ALL)06/95]
Ford Motor Company recommends obeying posted speed limits.
*
[DR10000(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility of
loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for
extended periods of time may result in damage to vehicle
components.
*
[DR10100(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (55 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
%
*
[DR10200(ALL)01/95]
Driving in Bad Weather
%
*
[DR10300(ALL)01/95]
Slippery roads
[DR10400(ALL)02/95]
Drive cautiously on wet or snowy roads.
*
[DR10500(ALL)03/95]
■ Do not quickly move the steering wheel unless necessary.
*
[DR10600(ALL)01/93]
■ Drive more slowly than you would normally.
*
[DR10700(ALL)01/95]
■ Give your vehicle more distance to stop.
*
[DR10800(ALL)01/93]
■ Use the “squeeze” technique for braking as described in
previous braking sections.
*
[DR10900(ALL)02/93]
■ Consider using one of the lower gears.
*
[DR11000(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
To avoid skidding and losing control on slippery roads,
do not downshift into 1 (First) when you are moving
faster than 20 mph (32 km/h).
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
Driving Your Villager
241
*
[DR11100(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
The Anti-Lock Brake System may not prevent brake
lock-up on extremely slippery surfaces.
%
*
[DR11200(ALL)01/95]
High water
*
[DR11300(ALL)05/90]
Do not drive through flooded areas unless you are sure that the
water is below the bottom of the wheel hubs.
*
[DR11400(ALL)01/93]
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. You may
have limited traction or wet brakes so allow extra stopping
distance because your vehicle will not stop as quickly as usual.
*
[DR11500(ALL)01/93]
After you drive through the standing water, apply your brakes
gently several times as your vehicle moves slowly to help dry
the brakes.
*
[DR11600(ALL)01/93]
Rocking the Vehicle
*
[DR11700(ALL)01/93]
If your vehicle gets stuck (for example, in mud or snow), you
may rock it out. Shift in a steady rhythm between forward and
reverse gears. At the same time, press lightly on the accelerator.
If you are still stuck after a few minutes of rocking, call for a
tow truck.
*
[DR11800(ALL)01/93]
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes. This may
overheat the engine, damage the transaxle, or damage the tires.
*
[DR11900(ALL)03/95] Driving With a Heavy Load
*
[DR12000(ALL)01/93]
The Safety Compliance Certification Label, located on the
driver’s door pillar, provides important information regarding
the weight limits your vehicle can safely carry or tow. The total
weight of your vehicle, including the weight of the passengers
and cargo, should never be more than the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). Also, the weight that your vehicle carries on
the front axle and rear axle should never be more than the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the respective axle.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
242
*
[DR12100(ALL)01/93]
The load capacities of your vehicle’s tires affect the GVWR or
GAWR limitations. Using replacement tires with a higher weight
limit than the originals does not increase GVWR or GAWR.
Using lower capacity replacement tires may lower GVWR and
GAWR limitations.
*
[DR12200(ALL)02/95]
RWARNING
If the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label is exceeded, your vehicle
may be damaged or you may lose control and injure
someone.
*
[DR12300(ALL)01/93]
Vehicle/Trailer Loads
[DR12400(ALL)07/93]
Your vehicle may tow a Class I trailer up to 2,000 lbs. (907 kg)
provided the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is less than the
GVWR shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
With the optional trailer tow package, your vehicle can tow a
trailer up to 3,500 lbs. (1,588 kg).
*
[DR12500(ALL)02/95]
Trailer Towing (may require trailer tow option package)
*
[DR12600(ALL)01/93]
Towing a trailer puts an additional load on your vehicle’s
engine, transaxle, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. For your
safety and for the good of your vehicle, use the right equipment
for the type of trailer you tow.
*
[DR12700(ALL)02/92]
■ Stay within the load limits when you tow.
*
[DR12800(ALL)01/93]
■ Carefully and thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing,
making sure to use the right equipment and to attach it
properly. See Preparing to Tow in this section.
*
[DR12900(ALL)01/93]
■ Use extra caution when driving your vehicle while you tow.
See Driving While You Tow in this section.
*
[DR13000(ALL)01/93]
■ Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. See
Servicing Your Vehicle if You Tow in this section.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
Driving Your Villager
243
*
[DR13100(ALL)05/94]
Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least
500 miles (800 km).
*
[DR13700(ALL)01/93] Vehicle Loading Information
*
[DR13800(ALL)04/95]
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not
volume, so you cannot necessarily use all the available space.
Maximum safe vehicle weights as well as tire sizes, rim sizes
and inflation pressures are specified for your vehicle at the
assembly plant on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
The certification label is located on the pillar in the driver’s
door opening.
*
[DR13900(ALL)01/93]
Each additional item of equipment affects how much cargo a
vehicle can carry. If a vehicle is overloaded, performance will
suffer and service concerns may arise.
*
[DR14000(ALL)04/95]
The following is a typical example of a Safety Compliance
Certification Label and an explanation of how this information
should be used:
[DR14100(ALL)09/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040166-D
The Safety Compliance Certification Label
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
244
*
[DR14200(ALL)01/93]
NOTE: The vehicle must not be loaded to both the front and
rear GAWR because the GVWR will be exceeded. The
GAWR of the front and rear axles exceed the GVWR
when added together.
[DR14300(ALL)04/95]
There are no numbers on the sample Safety Compliance
Certification Label shown. Refer to the actual numbers on your
vehicle’s Safety Compliance Certification Label.
*
[DR14500(ALL)01/93]
Understanding Loading Information
*
[DR14600(ALL)01/93]
There are five terms that are used to describe a vehicle’s ability
to carry a load:
*
[DR14700(ALL)01/93]
■ Base Curb Weight
*
[DR14800(ALL)01/93]
■ Payload
*
[DR14900(ALL)01/93]
■ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
*
[DR15000(ALL)01/93]
■ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
*
[DR15100(ALL)01/93]
■ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
*
[DR15200(ALL)06/92]
■ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)
*
[DR15300(ALL)01/93]
Base Curb Weight
*
[DR15400(ALL)04/95]
The base curb weight is the weight of the vehicle including fuel,
coolants, lubricants, emergency tools and spare wheel and tire.
It also includes any equipment that is standard. It does not
include passengers, cargo or optional equipment installed by
factory, dealer, aftermarket supplier or customer.
*
[DR15500(ALL)01/93]
Payload
*
[DR15600(ALL)07/93]
Maximum payload is the combined, maximum allowable weight
of cargo, occupants and optional equipment that the vehicle is
designed to carry. It is the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating minus
the base curb weight.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
Driving Your Villager
245
*
[DR15700(ALL)01/93]
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
*
[DR15800(ALL)09/93]
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the total weight of the
passengers, cargo and all equipment.
*
[DR15900(ALL)12/93]
It is important to remember that GVW is not a limit or a
specification, but actual weight. If an owner loads up the vehicle
and weighs it, that’s the GVW at that moment. If the owner
adds on more of a load and weighs it again, that becomes the
GVW.
%
*
[DR16000(ALL)03/91]
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
[DR16100(ALL)09/93]
To avoid overloading your vehicle, never exceed the specified
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating for your Villager. The GVWR is
the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle when fully
loaded including passengers, cargo and all equipment.
%
*
[DR16200(ALL)01/93]
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
*
[DR16300(ALL)01/93]
We have all seen a car or a truck that is loaded down in the
rear and riding high in the front. This is a dangerous condition
that usually means that the rear suspension components are
under severe strain and that vehicle handling is impaired. There
is more to carrying a load than just payload or GVWR.
[DR16400(ALL)09/93]
Your Safety Compliance Certification Label not only gives the
GVWR, it also gives the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
which is the maximum weight allowed on each axle system.
*
[DR16500(ALL)01/93]
The rating is based on the carrying capacity of the weakest axle
and suspension component as well as other factors. This is why
it is so important to observe vehicle loading ratings.
Overloading a vehicle punishes components and can lead to
shortened service life or outright failure.
*
[DR16600(ALL)01/93]
The weakest link in the suspension system defines the GAWR,
and may be the tires. Tires are rated to carry a specific
maximum load at a specific tire pressure.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
246
*
[DR16700(ALL)01/93]
When passenger car tires are installed on light trucks and
multipurpose passenger vehicles, they are rated at a 10% lower
load carrying capacity due to the differences in vehicle usages.
*
[DR16800(ALL)01/93]
With the tires inflated to the specified pressure, the total weight
of your vehicle must not exceed the GVWR and GAWR
specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. This
includes full fuel tank(s), vehicle equipment, and occupants, as
well as the cargo load.
*
[DR16900(ALL)05/93]
Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
*
[DR17000(ALL)01/93]
The GCWR is the maximum allowable weight of the towing
vehicle and the loaded trailer (including all cargo and
passengers).
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
Driving Your Villager
247
*
[DR17100(ALL)07/93]
Calculating the Payload for Your Vehicle
*
[DR17200(ALL)03/91]
To know how much weight your vehicle can carry:
*
[DR17300(ALL)11/93] 1. Obtain the GVWR and GAWR from your Safety Compliance
Certification Label.
[DR17500(ALL)02/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040002-C
Safety Compliance Certification Label location
*
[DR17600(ALL)11/93] 2. Fill the fuel tank.
*
[DR17700(ALL)11/93] 3. Weigh your vehicle without cargo.
*
[DR17800(ALL)11/93] 4. Subtract vehicle actual weight from the GVWR to find out
how much more weight your vehicle can carry.
*
[DR17810(ALL)04/94] 5. Weigh the vehicle again once it is loaded to make sure that
the GVWR and front and rear GAWR’s are not exceeded.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
248
[DR17830(ALL)07/93]
Load Calculation — (Trailers)
[DR17840(ALL)07/93]
The trailer towing table shows the maximum allowable trailer
weight and maximum GCWR for vehicles with and without the
trailer towing package.
[DR17850(ALL)07/93]
For a particular vehicle, the allowable trailer weight may be
lower depending upon the vehicle’s actual gross vehicle weight.
(GVW is the weight of the vehicle including passengers,
equipment, cargo.)
[DR17860(ALL)07/93]
You must determine the appropriate trailer weight for your
vehicle at its particular GVW while adhering to GVWR, GAWR,
GCWR and maximum trailer weight ratings.
[DR17870(ALL)07/95]
■ Fill the fuel tank.
[DR17875(ALL)07/93]
■ Load the vehicle as it would be loaded when towing a
trailer (including cargo, trailer hitch, etc.).
[DR17880(ALL)07/93]
■ Weigh the vehicle to determine its GVW. Do not exceed
GVWR and GAWR.
[DR17885(ALL)07/93]
■ Obtain the appropriate GCWR from the trailer towing table.
[DR17890(ALL)07/93]
■ Subtract the loaded vehicle weight (GVW) from the GCWR.
This is the maximum trailer weight your vehicle can pull
given its particular GVW.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
Driving Your Villager
249
%
*
[DR18000(ALL)01/93]
Trailer towing table
[DR18050(ALL)11/93]
eight pica
chart:0040244-B
*
[DR18080(ALL)07/93]
If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargo from your
vehicle accordingly. If your vehicle exceeds either GAWR, shift
the load or remove cargo accordingly.
[DR18090(ALL)07/93]
To determine actual GCW, weigh the total vehicle and trailer
and also weigh the trailer separately to verify its weight.
*
[DR18200(ALL)01/93]
Trailers
*
[DR18300(ALL)01/93]
Towing a trailer safely means having the proper weight on the
tongue (usually 10-15% of the trailer weight).
*
[DR18500(ALL)02/95]
RWARNING
If the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label is exceeded, your vehicle
may be damaged or you may lose control and injure
someone.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
250
*
[DR18600(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limits of the vehicle and
could result in engine damage, transaxle/axle damage,
structural damage, loss of control, and personal injury.
*
[DR18700(ALL)01/95]
Preparing to Tow
*
[DR18800(ALL)05/93]
For your safety and for the good of your vehicle, use the right
equipment for the type of trailer you tow. Also, make sure that
all towing equipment is properly attached to your vehicle. If
you are not certain that you are using the right equipment in
the proper manner, see your dealer or a reliable trailer dealer.
%
*
[DR18900(ALL)01/93]
Hitches
*
[DR19000(ALL)01/93]
For towing trailers up to 2,000 lbs. (907 kg), use a good
weight-carrying hitch and hitch ball which uniformly distributes
the trailer tongue load through the underbody structure.
[DR19100(ALL)02/94]
An optional trailer towing package is available for towing
trailers up to 3,500 lbs. (1587 kg). Use a frame-mounted weight
distributing hitch for trailers over 2,000 lbs. (907 kg).
*
[DR19200(ALL)01/93]
Do not use single clamp bumper hitches or hitches that attach
to the axle.
*
[DR19300(ALL)01/93]
Whenever a trailer hitch and hardware are removed, make sure
all mounting holes in the underbody are properly sealed to
prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle.
*
[DR19400(ALL)04/94]
Safety chains
*
[DR19500(ALL)01/93]
Always use safety chains between your vehicle and trailer.
Cross chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for
turning corners. Connect safety chains to the vehicle frame or
hook retainers. Never attach chains to the bumper.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
Driving Your Villager
251
*
[DR19600(ALL)01/93]
Trailer Brakes
*
[DR19700(ALL)01/93]
Separate trailer brakes are required on most trailers weighing
over 1,500 lbs. (680 kg).
*
[DR19800(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly
to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not
have enough braking power and your chances of having
a collision greatly increase.
*
[DR19900(ALL)01/93]
Trailer Lamps
*
[DR20000(ALL)01/93]
Make sure your trailer lamps conform to federal and local
regulations.
*
[DR20100(ALL)01/93]
Class I Trailer Tow electrical wiring provides two circuits (right
hand and left hand) to operate trailer stop/turn tail lamps. Each
stop/turn circuit will operate one combination stop/turn light
bulb (# 1157, 3157, 2357, or 3357) on the trailer. Never add more
than one trailer light bulb to one circuit.
*
[DR20200(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified
amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a
fire.
[DR20210(ALL)04/94]
Trailer Tow Module (If equipped)
[DR20220(ALL)06/94]
The trailer tow module on your vehicle (if equipped) allows
turn/stop lamp control on a trailer being towed by your
vehicle.
[DR20230(ALL)04/94]
The trailer tow package includes:
[DR20240(ALL)04/94]
■ trail or tow module which draws power from the vehicle
stop lamp fuse
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
252
[DR20250(ALL)04/94]
■ one SAE J1239 specified connector
[DR20260(ALL)04/94]
■ one extension harness within the rear bumper
[DR20270(ALL)04/94]
If you need further assistance in wiring a trailer to your vehicle,
contact your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
*
[DR20300(ALL)01/95]
Driving While You Tow
*
[DR20400(ALL)05/95]
Be especially careful when driving while you tow a trailer.
Never drive faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) when you tow in
hilly country on hot days. Also, anticipate stops so that you can
brake gradually.
*
[DR20500(ALL)01/93]
If you use the speed control while you are towing on very long,
steep grades, the speed control may shut off automatically.
*
[DR20600(ALL)06/95]
When descending a steep grade with a trailer, operate in Drive
rather than Overdrive. If additional braking is needed, shift into
2 (Second) or 1 (First) gear.
*
[DR20700(ALL)05/95]
Servicing your vehicle if you tow
[DR20800(ALL)09/93]
If you tow a trailer for a long distance, your vehicle will need
to be serviced more frequently than usual. See the Maintenance
Schedule and Record booklet in the Owner’s portfolio.
*
[DR20900(ALL)01/93]
Trailer towing tips
*
[DR21000(ALL)11/89]
Before starting on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backing
in an area away from heavy traffic. Get to know the “feel” of
the vehicle/trailer combination.
*
[DR21100(ALL)01/93]
Practice backing up. Back up very slowly, with someone outside
at the rear of your trailer to guide you. Place your hand at the
bottom of the steering wheel and move it in the direction you
want the rear of the trailer to swing. Slight movement of the
steering wheel results in a much larger movement of the rear of
the trailer.
*
[DR21200(ALL)11/89]
When turning, drive slightly beyond the normal turning point
so the trailer wheels will clear curbs or other obstructions.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
Driving Your Villager
253
*
[DR21300(ALL)01/93]
Allow more room for stopping with a trailer attached. Trailer
brakes should be applied first, whether manually or
automatically controlled, when approaching a stop.
*
[DR21400(ALL)01/93]
For an easy-to-operate vehicle/trailer combination, the trailer
tongue load should be approximately 10-15% of the loaded
trailer weight.
*
[DR21500(ALL)02/94]
Make a thorough check of your equipment before starting out
on the road. After you have traveled about 50 miles (80 km),
stop in a protected area and double-check your hitch and
electrical connections. Also check trailer wheel lug nuts for
tightness.
[DR21600(ALL)01/93]
When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather,
place the gearshift selector lever in Park (P) to increase the
engine idle speed. This aids in engine cooling and air
conditioner efficiency. If the engine overheats, press the air
intake button to select the fresh air position to stop the air
conditioner compressor. Increase the engine speed for a short
time.
*
[DR21700(ALL)01/93]
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
However, if you must park on a grade, place wheel chocks
under the trailer’s wheels as follows:
[DR21800(ALL)04/94] 1. Apply the main brake pedal with your foot and hold it.
*
[DR21900(ALL)11/93] 2. Have another person place the wheel chocks under the
trailer wheels.
[DR22000(ALL)04/94] 3. With the chocks in place, release the brake pedal, making
sure the chocks are holding.
[DR22100(ALL)04/94] 4. Apply the parking brake by pressing the main brake pedal
down firmly with your right foot while depressing the
parking brake pedal with your left foot.
*
[DR22200(ALL)06/95] 5. Shift the gearshift lever into P (Park).
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
254
*
[DR22300(ALL)01/93]
To start, after being parked on a grade:
[DR22400(ALL)04/94] 1. Apply the main brake pedal with your foot and hold it.
*
[DR22500(ALL)11/93] 2. Start the engine.
*
[DR22600(ALL)11/93] 3. Shift the gearshift lever into gear and release the parking
brake.
[DR22700(ALL)04/94] 4. Release the main brake pedal and move the vehicle uphill to
free the wheel chocks.
[DR22800(ALL)04/94] 5. Apply the main brake pedal and hold while another person
retrieves the chocks.
File:11vxdrn.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:50 1996
255
Roadside Emergencies
[RE00700(ALL)03/94] Jump-Starting Your Battery
*
[RE00800(ALL)01/93]
Your vehicle’s battery may discharge if you leave the lights or
any electrical equipment on after you turn the engine off. If this
happens, you may be able to jump-start from a booster battery
to start your vehicle.
*
[RE00900(ALL)02/95]
RWARNING
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to
flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result
in injury or vehicle damage.
*
[RE01000(ALL)02/95]
RWARNING
To protect yourself when charging a battery, always
shield your face and eyes. Make sure that you can
breathe fresh air.
%
*
[RE01100(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Applying too much pressure on the ends when lifting a
battery could cause acid to spill. Lift the battery with a
carrier or with your hands on the opposite corners.
%
*
[RE01200(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns skin, eyes,
and clothing.
*
[RE01210(ALL)06/95]
If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or clothing,
immediately flush the area with water for at least 15 minutes. If
someone swallows the acid, have him or her drink lots of milk
or water first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or vegetable
oil. Call a doctor immediately.
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
256
%
*
[RE01300(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns skin, eyes,
and clothing.
*
[RE01400(ALL)03/95]
To avoid damaging your vehicle or your battery, and to avoid
injury to yourself, follow these directions for preparing your
vehicle to jump-start and connecting the jumper cables in the
order they are given. If in doubt, call for road service.
*
[RE01500(ALL)03/95]
Preparing Your Vehicle
*
[RE01600(ALL)03/95] 1. Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, so you need to
use a 12-volt jumper system. You will damage your starting
motor, ignition system, and other electrical parts if you
connect them to a 24-volt power supply (either two 12-volt
batteries in series or a 24-volt generator set).
*
[RE01700(ALL)03/95] 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle. You
could damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
*
[RE01800(ALL)04/95] 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled
vehicle. Make sure the vehicles do not touch each other. Set
the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the
engine cooling fan and other moving parts.
*
[RE01900(ALL)03/95] 4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive
corrosion before you attach the jumper cables.
*
[RE02000(ALL)01/93] 5. Turn on the heater blower in both vehicles. Turn off all other
switches and lights in both vehicles to prevent possible
damage to either vehicle’s electrical systems.
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
Roadside Emergencies
257
%
*
[RE02100(ALL)05/95]
Connecting the jumper cables
*
[RE02200(ALL)03/95] 1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the discharged battery. (You can connect either
jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal, as long as you use
the same cable for both positive terminals.) Most jumper
cables have a red cable and a black cable. The red cable is
generally used for the positive terminals and the black for
the negative ones.
*
[RE02300(ALL)04/95] 2. Connect the other end of the first cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the booster battery.
*
[RE02400(ALL)05/95] 3. Connect one end of the second cable to the negative (s)
terminal of the booster battery — NOT to the discharged
battery.
*
[RE02500(ALL)04/95] 4. Connect the other end of the second cable to a good metallic
surface on the engine or frame of the disabled vehicle.
*
[RE02600(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark
may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the
battery.
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
258
[RE02700(ALL)06/95]
27-1/2 pica art:0040169-E
Sequence for connecting jumper cables
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
Roadside Emergencies
259
*
[RE02800(ALL)03/95]
Jump-Starting
*
[RE02900(ALL)03/95] 1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not in the way of
moving engine parts, then start the booster vehicle. Run the
engine at a moderate speed.
*
[RE03000(ALL)03/95] 2. Let the discharged battery charge for a few minutes and then
start the disabled vehicle. It may take a couple of tries before
the vehicle starts. If the vehicle does not start after several
attempts, there may be a different problem.
*
[RE03100(ALL)03/95] 3. When both vehicles are running, let them idle for a few
minutes to charge the discharged battery.
*
[RE03200(ALL)03/95]
Removing jumper cables
*
[RE03300(ALL)03/95] 1. Always remove the jumper cables in the reverse order.
Remove the negative (s) end of the jumper cable from the
metallic surface on the engine or frame of the disabled
vehicle.
*
[RE03400(ALL)05/95] 2. Remove the negative (s) cable from the booster battery.
*
[RE03500(ALL)06/95] 3. Remove the positive (+) cable from the booster battery.
*
[RE03600(ALL)05/95] 4. Remove the other end of the positive (+) cable from the
discharged battery.
[RE03750(ALL)02/95]
If you need to replace your battery, see Battery in the Servicing
Your Villager chapter.
*
[RE03800(ALL)01/93] Changing a Flat Tire
*
[RE03900(ALL)01/95]
If you get a flat tire while you are driving, do not apply the
brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease the speed. Hold the
steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the
side of the road. Park on a level spot, turn off the ignition, set
the parking brake, and turn on the hazard flashers.
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
260
*
[RE04000(ALL)03/95]
The Temporary Spare Tire
*
[RE04100(ALL)03/94]
Your vehicle has a temporary spare tire (unless you ordered the
optional full-size spare tire). This spare tire is smaller than a
regular tire and is designed for emergency use only. Use it only
when you get a flat tire and replace it as soon as you can. This
spare tire is marked with the words TEMPORARY USE ONLY
so that you can easily identify it.
*
[RE04200(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
If you use the temporary spare tire continuously or do
not follow these precautions, the tire could fail, causing
you to lose control of the vehicle, possibly injuring
yourself or others.
*
[RE04300(ALL)02/95]
When you drive with the temporary spare tire, DO NOT:
*
[RE04500(ALL)02/95]
■ exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) under any circumstances
*
[RE04600(ALL)01/93]
■ load your vehicle so that it is heavier than the maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the tire decal
*
[RE04700(ALL)01/93]
■ tow a trailer
*
[RE04800(ALL)01/93]
■ use tire chains
*
[RE04900(ALL)01/93]
■ try to repair the temporary spare tire or remove it from its
wheel
*
[RE05000(ALL)01/93]
■ use the wheel for any other type of vehicle
*
[RE05100(ALL)01/93]
■ drive through an automatic car wash. Because the temporary
spare tire is smaller than a conventional tire, it reduces the
ground clearance. Your vehicle may get caught in the rails
and it could be damaged.
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
Roadside Emergencies
261
*
[RE05200(ALL)03/95]
Spare Tire Location
[RE05300(ALL)01/93]
The spare tire is stored underneath your vehicle.
%
*
[RE05400(ALL)02/95]
To remove the spare tire:
*
[RE05500(ALL)01/93] 1. Open the liftgate and find the plastic hex nut cover in the
carpeting of the cargo area. Lift the cover to expose the hex
nut.
[RE05600(ALL)09/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040171-A
The spare tire hex nut
*
[RE05700(ALL)01/93] 2. Find the tapered lug wrench in the tool kit located behind
the jack in the right cargo area side panel.
*
[RE05800(ALL)12/93] 3. Fit the hex-shaped end of the lug wrench over the hex nut
in the floor of the cargo area. Turn counterclockwise until
the cable extends far enough to lower the spare tire to the
ground.
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
262
*
[RE05900(ALL)09/93]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040172-B
The spare tire in the lowered position
*
[RE06000(ALL)01/93] 4. Continue to turn the hex nut counterclockwise until the
spare tire retainer can be seen for removal.
*
[RE06100(ALL)01/93] 5. Remove the retainer from the center of the wheel. It may be
necessary to lift one end of the tire to disengage the retainer.
*
[RE06200(ALL)09/93]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040173-B
Removing the spare tire retainer
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
Roadside Emergencies
263
*
[RE06300(ALL)01/93]
Stowing the spare tire
[RE06400(ALL)04/95] 1. To raise the tire to the stowed position, lay the tire on the
ground with the inboard side facing up. Install the retainer
through the wheel center and slide the tire under the vehicle.
Fit the hex-shaped end of the wheel lug wrench over the hex
nut in the floor of the cargo area. Turn the wheel lug
wrench clockwise until the tire is raised to its original
position underneath the vehicle.
[RE06500(ALL)01/93]
NOTE: The lug wrench ratchets when the tire is raised to the
stowed position. It will not allow you to over-tighten.
*
[RE06600(ALL)01/93] 2. Check for proper seating against the underbody supports
and retighten if necessary.
*
[RE06700(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Make sure spare tires and jacking equipment are stowed
and secured in the proper storage location.
*
[RE06800(ALL)03/95]
Preparing to Change the Tire
*
[RE06900(ALL)05/94]
You should only raise your vehicle with a jack properly placed
at the front or rear jacking points.
*
[RE07000(ALL)06/95] 1. Make sure that your vehicle will not move or roll. Put the
gearshift lever in P (Park). Set the parking brake and block
the wheel — in both directions — that is diagonally opposite
the tire that you are changing.
*
[RE07100(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the
transaxle alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving
or slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park).
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
264
*
[RE07200(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a
tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both
directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other
side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
*
[RE07300(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else
could be seriously injured.
[RE07400(ALL)01/93] 2. Get out the spare tire and jack. See previous section for
instructions on spare tire removal. The jack is located in the
rear storage compartment in the right door panel of the
cargo area. You will have to unfasten the jack before
removing it as shown in the illustration.
[RE07450(ALL)09/93]
NOTE: All occupants should be out of the vehicle while it is
on the jack.
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
Roadside Emergencies
265
[RE07500(ALL)09/93]
24 pica art:0040170-C
Jack storage location
*
[RE07600(ALL)01/93] 3. Insert the tapered end of the jack handle behind the wheel
cover of the tire to be changed and gently pry it off. When
you want to replace the wheel cover, simply align the valve
stem to the slot in the cover and press it back on.
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
266
[RE07700(ALL)06/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040177-D
Removing the wheel cover
[RE07800(ALL)01/93]
If you have the optional cast-aluminum wheel covers, remove
the wheel cap to gain access to the lug nuts. Insert the tapered
end of the jack handle behind the notch in the wheel cap and
gently pry it off. To replace it, press it back on. You must line
up the raised circle on the back of the wheel cap with the
indented area on the wheel in order to press the wheel cap on.
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
Roadside Emergencies
267
[RE07900(ALL)09/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040181-B
Removing the optional wheel cap
*
[RE08000(ALL)02/95] 4. Fit the hex-shaped end of the lug wrench over the wheel lug
nuts and loosen them one-half turn (counterclockwise). Do
not remove the wheel lug nuts until you raise the tire off the
ground.
*
[RE08100(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle has the optional locking lug nuts, you must
use the lug nut removal tool provided with your vehicle’s
tool kit.
*
[RE08200(ALL)02/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0040182-A
Anti-theft lug nut
*
[RE08300(ALL)01/93] 5. Fit the jack under the proper jacking point indicated by the
notch in the bottom of the door frame panel.
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
268
[RE08400(ALL)06/94]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040180-A
The notches for the jack
[RE08500(ALL)09/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040174-B
Placing the jack
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
Roadside Emergencies
269
[RE08550(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not jack on the running board.
*
[RE08600(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off
the ground, such as when changing a tire.
*
[RE08700(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any part
of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do
not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack.
The jack is only meant for changing the tire.
*
[RE08800(ALL)05/94]
RWARNING
Never raise your vehicle by using a bumper jack. The
bumper could be damaged or the jack could slip and you
could be injured.
[RE08900(ALL)01/93] 6. Insert the jack handle into the jack, and then slide the
tapered end of the jack handle through one of the slots in
the lug nut wrench. All of these tools are needed to jack up
a vehicle.
[RE09000(ALL)01/93]
NOTE: If Ford Accessory Running Boards have been
installed, use the jack adapters supplied with the
running boards as described on the inside of the jack
storage area cover.
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
270
[RE09100(ALL)09/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040175-B
The jack and handle assembly
*
[RE09200(ALL)01/93] 7. Turn the lug nut wrench (attached to the jack handle)
clockwise to raise the vehicle off the ground.
*
[RE09300(ALL)01/93] 8. Remove the wheel lug nuts with the lug nut wrench.
*
[RE09400(ALL)01/93] 9. Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare tire.
*
[RE09500(ALL)05/94] 10.Place the wheel lug nuts on the spare tire. Use the lug nut
wrench to screw the lug nuts snug against the wheel, but do
not tighten fully.
*
[RE09600(ALL)02/95] 11.Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise.
*
[RE09700(ALL)01/93] 12.Use the wheel lug wrench to tighten lug nuts in the
appropriate sequence. Re-check for complete tightness.
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
Roadside Emergencies
271
%
*
[RE09800(ALL)09/93]
7-1/2 pica art:0040176-A
Lug nut tightening sequence
[RE09900(ALL)04/95]
The lug nuts should be tightened to 72—87 ft-lb (98—118 N%m).
[RE10000(ALL)12/93]
RWARNING
Using wheels or lug nuts different than the original
equipment could damage the wheel or mounting system.
This damage could allow the wheels to come off while
the vehicle is being driven. If a wheel comes off while
the vehicle is in motion, it could cause loss of vehicle
control and may result in collision.
*
[RE10100(ALL)01/93] 13.Replace the wheel cover by pressing it into place. If you
have the standard wheel covers, you must align the notch in
the wheel cover with the tire’s valve stem and align the
recess in the back of the wheel cover with one of the lug
nuts. If you have the optional aluminum wheel, press the
center wheel cap into place after matching up the design of
the wheel cap to the wheel.
[RE10200(ALL)01/93] 14.Make sure the jack is securely fastened. When you replace
the jack in the jack storage compartment, place the base
against the square-shaped fastening bracket and open the
jack slightly so that the jack is snug against the fastening
brackets.
*
[RE10300(ALL)01/93] 15.Store the flat tire under the vehicle just as you would store
the spare tire. Refer to the section on Stowing the Spare Tire
in this chapter.
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
272
[RE10400(ALL)09/93]
24 pica art:0040178-C
Storing the jack
[RE10500(ALL)01/93] 16.Make sure the lug wrench is secured back into the tool kit
and store it next to the jack.
[RE10600(ALL)01/93] 17.Unblock the wheels.
*
[RE10700(ALL)01/93]
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles
(800 km) of operation, after any wheel change, or any time the
lug nuts are loosened.
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
Roadside Emergencies
273
*
[RE10800(ALL)01/93] Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch
*
[RE10900(ALL)03/95]
If the engine cranks but does not start or if you have had a
collision, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been
triggered. The shut-off switch is a device that stops the fuel
pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt.
*
[RE11000(ALL)01/95]
For information on how to check and reset the fuel pump
shut-off switch, see Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Index.
*
[RE11150(ALL)05/95] Towing Your Vehicle
[RE11175(ALL)04/95]
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional
towing service or, if you are a member, your roadside assistance
center.
[RE11200(ALL)07/95]
DO NOT TOW YOUR VILLAGER WITH SLINGBELT
EQUIPMENT. Ford Motor Company has not developed or
approved a T-hook sling-type procedure. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
274
[RE11500(ALL)09/93]
27-1/2 pica
art:0040179-B
Towing the vehicle
*
[RE11550(ALL)04/95]
When calling for a tow truck, tell the operator what kind of
vehicle you have. A towing manual is available from Ford
Motor Company for all authorized tow truck operators. Have
your tow truck driver refer to this manual for the proper
hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
File:12vxren.ex
Update:Tue Jun 4 11:42:14 1996
275
Customer Assistance
%
*
[HS00710(ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance
[HS00715(ALL)05/96]
Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour, seven-day-a-week
hotline with trained operators that put you in touch with the
help you need if you experience a problem with your vehicle.
This complimentary service is provided to you throughout your
warranty period of 3 years or 36,000 miles (60,000 km),
whichever comes first. To purchase Roadside Assistance
coverages beyond this period (available through Ford Auto Club
in the United States or Ford and Lincoln-Mercury dealers in
Canada), contact your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
Additional Roadside Assistance coverage is unavailable in
Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands.
*
[HS00720(ALL)06/94]
Roadside Assistance will cover the following:
*
[HS00725(ALL)06/94]
■ Mount your spare if you have a flat tire.
*
[HS00730(ALL)06/94]
■ Jump-start your battery if it is dead.
*
[HS00735(ALL)06/94]
■ Unlock your vehicle if you are locked out.
*
[HS00740(ALL)06/94]
■ Bring you fuel if you run out.
*
[HS00745(ALL)06/94]
■ Tow your vehicle if you are stranded. Even non-warranty
related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in mud or snow,
are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound towing
and repossession).
*
[HS00750(ALL)06/94]
How to use Roadside Assistance
*
[HS00755(ALL)06/94]
Your Roadside Assistance identification card can be found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in your glove compartment. Complete
the card and place it in your wallet for quick reference.
*
[HS00760(ALL)04/95]
To receive roadside assistance in the United States call
1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006).
*
[HS00765(ALL)04/95]
Should you need to arrange for roadside assistance yourself,
Ford Motor Company will reimburse the reasonable cost. To
obtain information about reimbursement call 1-800-241-FORD (in
Canada call 1-800-665-2006).
File:13vxhsn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:32:10 1996
276
*
[HS00800(ALL)01/93] If You Have a Service Concern
*
[HS00900(ALL)01/93]
Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford and Lincoln-Mercury
dealerships to service your vehicle. This section tells you how to
get service or maintenance for your vehicle.
%
*
[HS01610(ALL)02/95]
Service/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. or Canada)
*
[HS01700(ALL)04/95]
Ford recommends taking your vehicle to your selling dealer
who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. You may,
however, take your vehicle to any authorized Ford or
Lincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, your dealer will be able
to resolve your concern.
*
[HS01800(ALL)03/95]
If you are not satisfied with the service you received from your
dealership’s service department, talk to the service manager at
the dealership. If you still are not satisfied, talk to the owner or
general manager of the dealership. In most cases, you will have
your concern resolved at this level.
*
[HS02100(ALL)04/95]
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs to be
serviced, or if you need more help than the dealer gave you,
contact the Ford Customer Assistance Center to find an
authorized dealership that may be able to help you.
[HS02110(ALL)05/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0040183-B
*
[HS02120(ALL)03/95]
If you live in Canada and have any questions or concerns that
the dealership cannot answer, contact the Customer Assistance
Centre.
File:13vxhsn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:32:10 1996
Customer Assistance
277
[HS02130(ALL)02/95]
6 pica art:0040188-B
*
[HS02175(ALL)02/95]
If you live in the U.S. and have any questions or concerns that
the dealership cannot answer, contact the Customer Assistance
Center.
*
[HS02200(ALL)04/95]
To process your request, the Ford Customer Assistance Center
needs the following information:
*
[HS02300(ALL)02/95]
■ your telephone number(s) (both business and home)
*
[HS02400(ALL)04/95]
■ the name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is
located
*
[HS02500(ALL)03/95]
■ the year and make of your vehicle
*
[HS02600(ALL)03/95]
■ the date purchased
*
[HS02700(ALL)03/95]
■ the current mileage on your vehicle
%
*
[HS02800(ALL)02/95]
■ your 17-digit Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) (shown on
your owner card)
[HS03300(ALL)05/96]
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you
may wish to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S. only) or
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP) in
Canada.
[HS03400(ALL)05/96]
A warranty dispute must be submitted to the Dispute
Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by
File:13vxhsn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:32:10 1996
278
certain state laws. This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights
which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.
%
*
[HS03500(ALL)02/95] The Dispute Settlement Board (U.S. Only)
[HS03600(ALL)05/96]
The Dispute Settlement Board is:
[HS03700(ALL)05/96]
■ an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty
disputes
[HS03800(ALL)05/96]
■ available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor
Company vehicles
[HS03900(ALL)05/96]
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states.
Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures and/or discontinue this service
without notice and without incurring obligations.
[HS04000(ALL)05/96]
What Kinds of Cases Does the Board Review?
[HS04100(ALL)05/96]
The Board reviews all warranty performance complaints on
Ford, Mercury and Lincoln cars and Ford and Mercury light
trucks under the new vehicle limited warranty that have not
been resolved by either a dealer or Ford Motor Company,
except those involving:
[HS04200(ALL)05/96]
■ a non-Ford product
[HS04300(ALL)05/96]
■ a non-Ford dealership
[HS04400(ALL)05/96]
■ a vehicle sales transaction
[HS04500(ALL)05/96]
■ request for reimbursement of consequential expenses.
Expenses incidental to the warranty complaint being
reviewed are eligible for consideration
[HS04600(ALL)05/96]
■ items not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty
[HS04700(ALL)05/96]
■ items covered by a service contract
File:13vxhsn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:32:10 1996
Customer Assistance
279
[HS04800(ALL)05/96]
■ alleged liability claims
[HS04900(ALL)05/96]
■ property damage where the damage is significant when
compared to the economic loss alleged under the warranty
dispute
[HS05000(ALL)05/96]
■ cases currently in litigation
[HS05100(ALL)05/96]
■ vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household
purposes (except in states where the Dispute Settlement
Board is required to review commercial vehicles)
[HS05200(ALL)05/96]
Complaints involving vehicles in which applicable new vehicle
limited warranties have expired at receipt of your application
are not eligible. Eligibility may differ according to state law. For
example, see the unique brochures for California and Wisconsin
purchasers/lessees.
[HS05300(ALL)05/96]
How does the Board Work?
[HS05400(ALL)05/96]
The Board consists of:
[HS05500(ALL)05/96]
■ three consumer representatives
[HS05600(ALL)05/96]
■ a Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealer
[HS05700(ALL)05/96]
Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and
trained by an independent consulting firm. Dealers are chosen
because of their business leadership qualities.
[HS05800(ALL)05/96]
What the Board needs
[HS05900(ALL)05/96]
To have your case reviewed you must complete the application
in the DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the
application form.
[HS06000(ALL)05/96]
Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be
eligible, you will receive an acknowledgment indicating:
[HS06100(ALL)05/96]
■ the file number assigned to your application
[HS06200(ALL)05/96]
■ the toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent
administrator
File:13vxhsn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:32:10 1996
280
[HS06300(ALL)05/96]
Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative are
asked to submit statements at this time.
[HS06400(ALL)05/96]
To review your case properly, the Board needs the following
information:
[HS06500(ALL)05/96]
■ legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair
orders relevant to the case
[HS06600(ALL)05/96]
■ the year, make, model and Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) listed on your vehicle ownership license
[HS06700(ALL)05/96]
■ the date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s)
[HS06800(ALL)05/96]
■ the current mileage
[HS06900(ALL)05/96]
■ the name of the dealer who sold or serviced the vehicle
[HS07000(ALL)05/96]
■ a brief description of your unresolved concern
[HS07100(ALL)05/96]
■ a brief summary of the action taken with the dealer and
Ford Motor Company
[HS07200(ALL)05/96]
■ the names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the
dealership
[HS07300(ALL)05/96]
■ a description of the action you expect to resolve your
concern
[HS07400(ALL)05/96]
Should your case NOT qualify for review, a letter of explanation
will be mailed to you.
[HS07500(ALL)05/96]
Oral presentations
[HS07600(ALL)05/96]
If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and 36,000 miles of
the warranty start date, you have the right to make an oral
presentation before the Board. Indicate your choice to do so on
the application. Oral presentations may also be requested by the
Board.
File:13vxhsn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:32:10 1996
Customer Assistance
281
[HS07605(ALL)05/96]
Making a decision
[HS07610(ALL)05/96]
Board members will review all available information related to
the complaint, including oral presentations, if necessary. They
then arrive at a fair and impartial decision, decided by a simple
majority vote.
[HS07615(ALL)05/96]
Because the Board usually meets only once a month, some cases
may take longer than 30 days to be reviewed. The Board makes
every effort to resolve each case within 40 days of receiving the
consumer application form.
[HS07620(ALL)05/96]
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter.
The Board also provides a form on which to accept or reject the
Board’s decision. The decisions of the Board are binding on the
dealer and Ford, but not on consumers who may elect to pursue
other remedies available to them under state and federal law.
Decisions of the Board may be presented as evidence by any
party in subsequent legal proceedings that may be initiated,
where allowed by law.
[HS07625(ALL)05/96]
To Request a DSB Brochure/Application
[HS07630(ALL)05/96]
For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write to the
Board at the following address:
[HS07635(ALL)05/96]
6 pica art:0040272-A
File:13vxhsn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:32:10 1996
282
*
[HS07700(ALL)07/93] Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. only)
*
[HS07800(ALL)01/93]
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause
an accident or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor
Company.
*
[HS07900(ALL)01/95]
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company.
*
[HS08000(ALL)01/93]
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area)
or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
%
*
[HS08005(ALL)05/95] Ford of Canada Customer Assistance
*
[HS08015(ALL)03/95]
If you live in Canada and have any questions or concerns that
the dealership cannot answer, contact the Customer Assistance
Centre.
[HS08020(ALL)02/95]
6 pica art:0040188-B
File:13vxhsn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:32:10 1996
Customer Assistance
283
*
[HS08025(ALL)04/95]
Please have the following information available when contacting
the Customer Assistance Centre:
*
[HS08030(ALL)04/95]
■ your telephone number (both business and home)
%
*
[HS08035(ALL)09/95]
■ your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed on your
owner card and/or your vehicle ownership license
*
[HS08040(ALL)03/95]
■ the year and make of your vehicle
*
[HS08045(ALL)03/95]
■ the date purchased
*
[HS08050(ALL)04/95]
■ the name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is
located
*
[HS08055(ALL)03/95]
■ the current mileage on your vehicle
[HS08060(ALL)05/96]
Mediation/Arbitration Program
[HS08061(ALL)05/96]
In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by
Ford and the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in
an impartial third-party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP).
[HS08062(ALL)05/96]
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively
speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other
efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is
without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for
lengthy and expensive legal proceedings.
[HS08063(ALL)05/96]
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party Arbitrators
conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an
informal environment. These impartial Arbitrators review the
positions of the parties, make decisions and, where appropriate,
render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast,
fair and final as the arbitrator’s award is binding on both you
and Ford of Canada.
File:13vxhsn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:32:10 1996
284
[HS08064(ALL)05/96]
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces,
except Quebec. For more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly
at 1-800-207-0685.
*
[HS08070(ALL)09/95]
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relative
speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other
efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is
without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for
lengthy and expensive legal proceedings.
*
[HS08075(ALL)09/95]
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party Arbitrators
conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an
informal enviroment. These impartial Arbitrators review the
positions of the parties, make decisions and, where appropriate,
render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast,
fair and final as the Arbitrator’s award is binding on both you
and Ford of Cananda.
*
[HS08080(ALL)09/95]
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces,
except Quebec. For more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly
at 1-800-207-0685.
%
*
[HS08100(ALL)06/95] Getting Help Outside the U.S. and Canada
*
[HS08200(ALL)06/95]
Before you export your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate to make sure local
regulations do not prevent you from registering your vehicle.
Officials at the embassy can also help you decide whether you
should import your vehicle to that country.
*
[HS08300(ALL)01/93]
Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell you where to get
unleaded fuel. If you cannot get unleaded fuel or can get only
fuel with an anti-knock index that is lower than your vehicle
needs, contact a district or customer assistance center before you
leave the U.S. or Canada.
File:13vxhsn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:32:10 1996
Customer Assistance
285
*
[HS08400(ALL)06/95]
Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without a proper conversion
may damage the effectiveness of your emissions control system
and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford
Motor Company is not responsible for any damage that is
caused by use of improper fuel.
*
[HS08500(ALL)06/95]
You may also have difficulty importing your vehicle back into
the U.S. if you use leaded fuel.
*
[HS08600(ALL)01/93]
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or
living in Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the
Middle East, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the
dealership cannot help you, contact:
*
[HS08700(ALL)10/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0040273-C
*
[HS08800(ALL)06/95]
If you are in other foreign countries, contact the nearest Ford
dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, they can direct
you to the appropriate Ford affiliate office.
*
[HS08900(ALL)06/95]
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate
outside of the U.S. or Canada, register your Vehicle
Identification Number and new address with Ford Motor
Company Export Operations.
File:13vxhsn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:32:10 1996
287
Accessories
[AC00500(ALL)04/95] Ford Accessories for Your Villager
*
[AC00520(ALL)04/95]
Ford has many fine products available from your dealer to clean
your vehicle and protect its finishes. For best results, use the
following, or products of equivalent quality:
*
[AC00540(ALL)07/95]
twelve pica
chart:0032382-A
[AC00600(ALL)04/94]
Many accessories for your vehicle are available through your
local authorized dealer. These accessories have been designed to
meet your needs and are custom-designed to complement the
style and aerodynamics of your vehicle. Some of the available
accessories are listed here.
*
[AC00700(ALL)01/93] Safety, Comfort, and Convenience
*
[AC00800(ALL)06/93]
Comfort and Convenience
[AC00900(ALL)04/95]
Air Conditioning
Engine Block Heater
Remote Keyless Entry
File:14vxacn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:32:34 1996
288
*
[AC01000(ALL)01/93]
Protection and Appearance Equipment
[AC01100(ALL)04/95]
Aero Running Boards
Carpeted Floor Mats
Door Edge Guards
Cleaners, Waxes and Polishes
Front End Cover
Front End Mini Cover
Lubricants and Oils
Molded Running Boards
Side Window Shields
Soft Luggage Cover
[AC01200(ALL)01/93]
Protection and Appearance Equipment (Continued)
[AC01300(ALL)04/94]
Styled Wheel Protector Locks
Super Seal Fabric Protector (U.S. Only)
Super Seal Rustproofing (U.S. Only)
Super Seal Undercoating (U.S. Only)
Touch-Up Paints
Flat Splash Guards
*
[AC01400(ALL)01/93]
Safety Equipment
*
[AC01500(ALL)11/93]
Vehicle Security Systems
File:14vxacn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:32:34 1996
Accessories
289
*
[AC01600(ALL)01/93]
Travel Equipment
[AC01700(ALL)05/95]
Aero Hood Deflector
Bike Rack Adaptor (Attaches to Base Roof Rack)
Four Season Base Roof Rack
Multi Sport Removable Rack
Multi Sport Bike Adaptor
Multi Sport Ski/Snowboard Adaptor
Multi Sport Water Sport Adaptor
Ski Rack Adaptor (Attaches to Base Roof Rack)
*
[AC01800(ALL)03/94]
NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment, passengers, and
luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total
weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear
axle (GVWR, GAWR as shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label). Consult your dealer
for specific weight information.
*
[AC01900(ALL)04/94]
NOTE: Devices that emit radio frequency (RF) energy such as
AM/FM radios, mobile communication systems
(two-way radios, telephones) and radio controlled
security systems, are subject to the rules and
regulations of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) 47 CFR Parts 2 and 15. Any such
system installed in your vehicle should comply with
those rules and should be installed only by a
qualified technician. In addition, to insure continued
compliance with the FCC’s requirements, RF devices
must not be modified or changed in a manner not
expressly approved by Ford Motor Company.
File:14vxacn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:32:34 1996
290
*
[AC02000(ALL)05/94]
NOTE: Mobile communication systems, particularly if not
properly installed, may adversely affect the operation
of the vehicle. For example, such systems, when
operated, may cause the engine to stumble or stall. In
addition, such systems may themselves be damaged,
or their operation affected, by the operation of the
vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door
openers, and other transmitters whose power output is
5 watts or less, ordinarily will not affect vehicle
operation.)
*
[AC02100(ALL)04/94]
NOTE: Because Ford has no control over the operation or
manufacture of such systems or their installation, Ford
cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or
damage if this equipment is used.
File:14vxacn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:32:34 1996
292
[AC03100(ALL)05/93]
thirty-four pica
chart:0040330-A
File:14vxacn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:32:34 1996
Accessories
293
[AC03300(ALL)05/93]
thirty-four pica
chart:0040331-A
File:14vxacn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:32:34 1996
294
[AC03400(ALL)05/93]
thirty-four pica
chart:0040332-A
File:14vxacn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:32:34 1996
295
Servicing Your Villager
%
*
[SV01300(ALL)03/95] Service Made Easy
*
[SV01400(ALL)01/95]
Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle.
*
[SV01500(ALL)01/95] 1. When we can, we design parts that do not need to be
serviced.
*
[SV01600(ALL)01/95] 2. We want to make servicing your vehicle as easy as possible.
To help you:
*
[SV01700(ALL)01/93]
■ We highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow in your engine
compartment so that you can find them easily.
*
[SV01800(ALL)01/95]
■ When possible, we design parts — such as the headlamp
bulbs — that can be replaced without tools.
[SV01900(ALL)09/93]
■ We give you a Maintenance Schedule that makes tracking
routine service for your vehicle easy. The Maintenance
Schedule is located in the Maintenance Schedule and Record
booklet.
*
[SV02000(ALL)01/95]
This chapter tells you about the basic parts that you need to
check and service regularly.
[SV02150(ALL)02/95]
If your vehicle needs professional servicing, your dealership can
provide the parts and service required. Check your Warranty
Information Booklet to find out which parts and services are
covered. Also see the Customer Assistance chapter of this
Owner’s Manual.
[SV02225(ALL)02/95]
Ford Motor Company recommends that the Owner Maintenance
Checks listed in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet be
performed for the proper operation of your vehicle. In addition
to the conditions listed in the Owner Maintenance Checklist, be
alert for any unusual noise, vibration, or other indication that
your vehicle may need service. If you do notice something
unusual, see that your vehicle is serviced promptly.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
296
*
[SV02250(ALL)09/93]
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids, and service
parts that meet Ford Motor Company specifications. Motorcraft
parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in
your vehicle. Using these parts for replacement is your
assurance that Ford-built quality stays in your vehicle.
%
*
[SV02260(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a
responsible manner. Follow your community’s
standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call
your local recycling center to find out about recycling
automotive fluids.
%
*
[SV02300(ALL)06/95] Precautions When Servicing Your Vehicle
*
[SV02400(ALL)06/95]
Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle.
Here are some general precautions for your safety:
[SV02450(ALL)07/95]
■ Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic cooling fan. It
may come on at any time without warning. To avoid injury,
always disconnect the negative (-) terminal of the battery
before working near the fan.
*
[SV02600(ALL)06/95]
■ Do not work on a vehicle in an enclosed space with the
engine running, unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
*
[SV02700(ALL)08/95]
■ Never get under a vehicle while it is supported only by a
jack. If you must work under a vehicle, use safety stands.
*
[SV02800(ALL)06/95]
■ Keep all lit cigarettes and other smoking materials away
from the battery and all fuel-related parts.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
ServicingYourVillager
297
*
[SV03100(ALL)02/95]
If you plan to work under the hood while the engine is
off:
*
[SV03200(ALL)06/95]
WARNING
Settheparkingbrakeandmakesurethegearshiftis
securelylatchedinP(Park).Thiswillpreventyour
vehiclefrommovingunexpectedly.
*
[SV03300(ALL)01/93]
WARNING
Alwaysremovethekeyfromtheignitionafteryouturn
offtheengine.
*
[SV03400(ALL)03/95]
If you must work under the hood while the engine is
on:
[SV03450(ALL)07/95]
Settheparkingbrakefullyandmakesurethatthegearshiftis
securelylatchedinP(Park).Thiswillpreventyourvehiclefrom
movingunexpectedly.
*
[SV03700(ALL)02/95]
WARNING
Donotstartyourenginewiththeaircleanerremoved
anddonotremoveitwhiletheengineisrunning.
*
[SV03750(ALL)06/95]
■Ifyoumustworkwiththeenginerunning,avoidwearing
looseclothingorjewelrythatcouldgetcaughtinmoving
parts.Takeappropriateprecautionswithlonghair.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
298
%
*
[SV03800(ALL)03/95]
Opening the Hood
[SV03900(ALL)01/93] 1. Pull the hood release handle, located below the fuse panel
door.
[SV04000(ALL)09/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040189-C
Hood release handle location
[SV04100(ALL)01/93] 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the hood latch
under the hood in the front center of the vehicle.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
299
*
[SV04200(ALL)01/93] 3. Lift the hood and release the prop rod from its retaining
clip. Place the end of the prop rod in the prop rod hole
provided on the underside of the hood.
[SV04300(ALL)04/95]
24 pica art:0040190-C
The hood latch and prop rod
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
300
*
[SV04400(ALL)01/93]
To close the hood:
*
[SV04500(ALL)01/93] 1. Remove the prop rod from the slotted hole in the hood.
Place the rod in its retaining clip and close the hood with
enough force to make it latch. Be sure to oil the hood latch
every six months to maintain smooth operation.
*
[SV04600(ALL)01/93] 2. Try to lift the hood after closing it to be sure it is securely
latched.
%
*
[SV04700(ALL)04/95] Engine Compartment
[SV04800(ALL)04/94]
Your vehicle has a 3.0 liter EFI, V-6 engine. The following
illustration will show a diagram of your engine and where you
can find items that you should service regularly.
[SV04900(ALL)04/95]
fourteen pica
chart:0040238-B
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
301
[SV05000(ALL)04/95]
33-1/2 pica art:0040191-F
The engine compartment
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
302
%
*
[SV05025(ALL)04/95]
Cleaning the Engine
*
[SV05050(ALL)04/95]
A clean engine is more efficient because a buildup of grease and
dirt acts as an insulator, keeping the engine warmer than
normal.
*
[SV05075(ALL)07/95]
■ Extreme care must be used if a power washer is used to
clean the engine. The high pressure fluid could penetrate
sealed parts and assemblies causing damage or malfunctions.
*
[SV05100(ALL)08/95]
■ In order to avoid possible cracking of the engine block or
fuel injection pump, do not spray a hot engine or injection
pump with cold water.
*
[SV05125(ALL)07/95]
■ The alternator, distributor and air intake must be covered.
Covering these components will help prevent water damage.
*
[SV05150(ALL)04/95]
■ Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running. Water
getting into the engine may cause internal damage.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
ServicingYourVillager
303
%
*
[SV05200(ALL)03/95] FillingtheFuelTank
[SV05600(ALL)01/93]
Removing the tethered fuel cap
[SV05800(ALL)06/95] 1.Openfueldoorondriver’ssideofvehicle.
[SV06000(ALL)04/95] 2.Followthefuelcapremovalinstructionsandusecautionto
minimizethepossibilityoffuelsprayingwhenyouunscrew
thecap.
[SV06100(ALL)06/95]
10-1/2pica
art:0040219-C
Thetetheredfuelcap
*
[SV06290(ALL)07/95]
Ifyoulosethefuelcap,replaceitwithanauthorizedMotorcraft
orequivalentpart.
%
*
[SV06300(ALL)05/95]
WARNING
Ifyoudonotusetheproperfuelcap,thepressureinthe
fueltankcandamagethefuelsystemorcauseittowork
improperlyinacollision.
*
[SV06400(ALL)05/95]
WARNING
Ifthefuelcapisventingvapororifyouhearahissing
sound,waituntilitstopsbeforecompletelyremovingthe
cap.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
304
*
[SV06600(ALL)09/95]
NOTE:Ifyoureplaceyourfuelcapwithanaftermarketfuel
fillercap,thecustomerwarrantymaybevoidforany
damagetothefueltankand/orfuelsystem.
*
[SV06700(ALL)11/89]
Aventingfueltankisnotanabnormalcondition.Itmaybe
causedby:
*
[SV06800(ALL)05/95]
■toovolatileafuelfortheweatherconditions.Servicestations
sometimessellwintergradefuelinthesummer.
*
[SV06900(ALL)01/93]
■pullingaheavyloadonhotdays,orathighaltitudes.
*
[SV07000(ALL)05/95]
■extendedperiodsofidlingwiththeengineRPMincreased
abovethenormalidlerange.
*
[SV07100(ALL)05/95]
■parkingthevehicleinfullsunlightforextendedperiodson
extremelyhotdays.
*
[SV07110(ALL)04/94]
WARNING
Donotoverfillthefueltank.Thepressureinan
overfilledtankmaycauseleakageandleadtofuelspray
andfire.
*
[SV07120(ALL)05/95]
Beforeyoufillyourvehiclewithfuel,extinguishalllit
cigarettes,othersmokingmaterials,andanyopenflames.
*
[SV07125(ALL)05/95]
Tofillthetankproperly:
*
[SV07130(ALL)05/95] 1.Removethefuelcap.Proceedtoaddfueltothetankonlyif
yourvehicleisonlevelground.
[SV07140(ALL)04/95] 2.Makesureyoupumpunleadedfuelandputthenozzleall
thewayinsidethefuelfillerpipe.Thefueltankisnormally
fullafterthreeautomaticshutoffsofthenozzle.
*
[SV07150(ALL)05/95] 3.Ifyouspillanyfuelonthebodyofyourvehicle,cleanitoff
immediately.Thefuelmaydullorsoftenthepaintifyoudo
notwashitoff.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
305
*
[SV07160(ALL)06/95] 4. Replace the fuel cap tightly when you are finished. Turn it
clockwise until you hear at least three clicks. The ratcheting
mechanism allows the fuel cap to be sealed without
overtightening.
*
[SV07170(ALL)10/95] 5. Push the fuel door closed.
%
*
[SV07200(ALL)06/95]
Choosing the Right Fuel
[SV07300(ALL)05/96]
Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is
prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. The damage
may not be covered by your warranty.
[SV07350(ALL)05/96]
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel containing
manganese-based additives such as MMT. Additionally, vehicles
certified to California emission standards (indicated on the
underhood vehicle Emissions Control Information label) are
designed to operate on California reformulated gasolines. If
California reformulated gasoline is not available when you
refuel, your vehicle can be operated on non-California fuels.
However, even though your engine will perform adequately on
other gasolines, the performance of the emission control devices
and systems may be adversely affected. Repair of damage
casued by using a fuel that your vehicle was not designed for
may not be covered by your warranty.
[SV07370(ALL)05/96]
Octane recommendation
[SV08000(ALL)05/96]
Your vehicle is designed to use regular gasoline with an
(R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. We do not recommend gasolines
labeled as “regular” in high altitude areas that are sold with
octane ratings of 86 or even less.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
306
[SV08100(ALL)05/96]
6 pica art:0040193-A
Typical octane rating label
[SV08200(ALL)05/96]
Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly.
However, if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions on
the recommended octane fuel, see your dealer or a qualified
service techncian to prevent any engine damage.
[SV08300(ALL)05/96]
Fuel Quality
[SV08400(ALL)05/96]
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation
problems, try a different brand of fuel. If the condition persists,
see your dealer or a qualifies service technician.
[SV08500(ALL)05/96]
The American Automobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA)
issued a gasoline specification to provide information on high
quality fuels that optimize the performance of your vehicle. We
recommend the use of gasolines that meet the AAMA
specification if they are available.
[SV08600(ALL)05/96]
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to
your fuel tank if you continue to use a high-quality fuel.
[SV08700(ALL)05/96]
Gasolines for clean air
[SV08800(ALL)05/96]
Ford approves the use of gasolines to improve air quality,
including reformulated gasolines that contain oxygenates such as
a maximum of 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE. There should be no
more than 5% methanol with cosolvents and additives to protect
the fuel system.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
ServicingYourVillager
307
%
*
[SV10200(ALL)06/95]
SafetyInformationRelatingtoAutomotiveFuels
*
[SV10300(ALL)05/95]
WARNING
Automotivefuelscancauseseriousinjuryordeathif
misusedormishandled.
*
[SV10405(ALL)07/95]
■Turnvehicleoffwhenrefueling
*
[SV10505(ALL)07/95]
■Donotsmokewhenrefueling.Fuelsareextremely
flammable.
*
[SV10525(ALL)07/95]
■Donotsiphonanyfuelbymouth.
*
[SV10550(ALL)07/95]
WARNING
Gasolineorgasolineblendedwithmethanolcancause
blindnessandpossibledeathwhenswallowed.Ifany
fuelisswallowed,callaphysicianorpoisoncontrol
centerimmediately.
*
[SV10575(ALL)07/95]
■Avoidbreathingvaporswhilerefueling.
*
[SV10590(ALL)07/95]
■Iffuelissplashedontheskin,washwithsoapandwater.
[SV10625(ALL)06/95]
■Iffuelissplashedintheeyes,removecontactlenses(if
worn),flushwithwaterfor15minutes,andseekmedical
attention.
*
[SV10675(ALL)08/95]
Gasolineandgasolineblendsmaycontainsmallamountsof
carcinogens,suchasbenzene.Long-termexposuretounleaded
gasolinevaporshascausedcancerinlaboratoryanimals.
*
[SV10705(ALL)08/95]
Ifyouaretakingthemedication“Antabuse”orotherformsof
disulfiramforthetreatmentofalcoholism,vapororskincontact
withagasoline-methanolblendmaycausethesamekindof
adversereactionasdrinkinganalcoholicbeverage.Insensitive
individuals,seriouspersonalinjuryorsicknesscouldresult.
Consultaphysicianpromptlyifyouexperienceanadverse
reaction.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
308
%
*
[SV12100(ALL)05/95]
Running Out of Fuel
*
[SV12150(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may
have an adverse effect on modern powertrain
components.
*
[SV12300(ALL)07/95]
You may need to crank the engine several times before the fuel
system starts to pump fuel from the tank to the engine.
%
*
[SV12400(ALL)05/95]
Fuel Economy
*
[SV12450(ALL)05/95]
Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency of your vehicle,
and can be calculated as Miles Per Gallon (MPG) or Liters Per
100 Kilometers (L/100K).
*
[SV12460(ALL)05/95]
Do not calculate fuel economy during your vehicle’s break-in
period. This would not be an accurate estimate of how much
fuel your vehicle will normally use.
*
[SV12475(ALL)05/95]
To calculate fuel economy:
*
[SV12505(ALL)05/95] 1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer
reading.
*
[SV12550(ALL)05/95] 2. Every time you buy fuel, record the amount (in gallons or
liters) purchased.
*
[SV12605(ALL)05/95] 3. After at least 3-5 tankfuls, fill the fuel tank and record the
final odometer reading.
*
[SV12650(ALL)10/95] 4. Use these equations to calculate your fuel economy:
*
[SV12705(ALL)10/95]
■ English: MPG U (total miles driven) V (gallons used)
[SV12750(ALL)06/95]
■ Metric: L/100k U Multiply the number of liters used by 100
and divide the answer by the number of kilometers
travelled.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
309
*
[SV13200(ALL)01/93]
Comparisons With Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) Fuel Economy Estimates
*
[SV13300(ALL)05/95]
EPA fuel economy figures are obtained from laboratory tests
under simulated road conditions and may not reflect the actual
conditions you experience or your style of driving. The EPA
fuel economy estimate is not a guarantee that you will achieve
the fuel economy shown.
*
[SV13550(ALL)05/95]
The following decrease fuel economy:
*
[SV13650(ALL)05/95]
■ Lack of regular, scheduled maintenance
*
[SV13750(ALL)05/95]
■ Rapid acceleration and excessive speed
*
[SV13950(ALL)05/95]
■ Driving with your foot on the brake
*
[SV14050(ALL)05/95]
■ Sudden stops
*
[SV14150(ALL)05/95]
■ Extended engine idling
*
[SV14250(ALL)05/95]
■ Using speed control in hilly terrain
[SV14350(ALL)02/95]
■ Extended use of the A/C, defroster, rear window defroster
and other accessories
*
[SV14450(ALL)05/95]
■ Underinflated tires
[SV14460(ALL)02/95]
■ Heavy loads
[SV14470(ALL)02/95]
■ Aftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski or luggage racks, bug
deflectors, etc.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
310
%
*
[SV14600(ALL)02/95] Engine Oil Recommendations
*
[SV14750(ALL)02/96]
We recommend using Motorcraft oil or an equivalent oil
meeting Ford Specification WSS-M2C153-F and displaying the
American Petroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK on the
front of the container.
*
[SV14850(ALL)03/95]
one third page
art:0060021-E
The API Certification Mark
*
[SV15000(ALL)01/95]
Never use:
*
[SV15100(ALL)01/95]
■ “Non-Detergent” oils
*
[SV15200(ALL)04/95]
■ Oils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG
%
*
[SV15300(ALL)01/95]
■ Additional engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine
treatments
%
*
[SV15400(ALL)03/95]
Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity are PREFERRED for
your vehicle. They provide the best engine performance, fuel
economy and engine protection for all climates down to -15˚F
(-25˚C).
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
311
[SV15500(ALL)02/94]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040196-B
Selecting the right viscosity for your climate
%
*
[SV15575(ALL)03/95]
Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED and of the preferred
viscosity may be used in your engine. The engine oil and oil
filter must still be changed according to the maintenance
schedule.
%
*
[SV15600(ALL)01/95]
Checking and Adding Engine Oil
*
[SV15700(ALL)03/95]
Since the proper amount of engine oil is important for safe
engine operation, check the oil using the dipstick each time you
put fuel in your vehicle. Remember the engine must be off, the
oil must be warm and the vehicle must be parked on level
ground.
%
*
[SV15800(ALL)03/95]
Checking the engine oil level:
*
[SV15900(ALL)02/95] 1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed up and allow a few
minutes for the engine oil to drain back into the oil pan.
[SV16000(ALL)07/95] 2. Set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift
is securely latched in P (Park).
*
[SV16100(ALL)02/95] 3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
*
[SV16200(ALL)03/95] 4. Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted in yellow) and
carefully pull it out of the engine.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
312
*
[SV16300(ALL)01/95] 5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back into position, making
sure it is fully seated.
[SV16400(ALL)05/93]
7-1/2 pica art:0040218-A
Engine oil dipstick
[SV16500(ALL)05/94] 6. Carefully pull the dipstick out again. If the oil level is below
the “L” line, add engine oil as necessary. If the oil level is
beyond the letter “H,” engine damage or high oil
consumption may occur and some oil must be removed from
the engine.
*
[SV16600(ALL)01/95] 7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it is fully seated.
%
*
[SV16650(ALL)03/95]
Adding engine oil
*
[SV16700(ALL)01/95]
It may be necessary to add some oil between oil changes. Make
sure you use a CERTIFIED engine oil of the preferred viscosity.
Your vehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply if engine
damage is caused by the use of improper engine oil.
*
[SV16800(ALL)03/95]
Add engine oil through the oil filler cap highlighted in yellow.
To add oil, remove the filler cap and use a funnel to pour oil
into the opening. Be careful not to overfill the engine. Recheck
the oil level after you finish adding oil.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
ServicingYourVillager
313
%
*
[SV16900(ALL)06/95]
ChangingtheEngineOilandtheOilFilter
*
[SV17200(ALL)04/95]
RefertotheMaintenanceScheduleandRecordbookletfor
recommendedintervals.
*
[SV17300(ALL)06/95]
Followthesedirectionstochangetheengineoilandoilfilter:
*
[SV17400(ALL)06/95] 1.Turntheengineoffafterithaswarmedup.
*
[SV17500(ALL)06/95] 2.Protectyourselffromengineheatandtheengineoilbeing
drained.
*
[SV17600(ALL)06/95] 3.Removetheoilpandrainplug(s)andoilfilter.
*
[SV17700(ALL)06/95] 4.Draintheoilintoacontaineruntilflowfromthedrainplug
hole(s)andthefiltermountingareaslowstoadrip.
*
[SV17800(ALL)06/95] 5.Installthedrainplug(s)andanewengineoilfilteraccording
todirectionsonthepackage.
*
[SV17900(ALL)09/95]
NOTE:SeeRefillCapacities,MotorcraftPartsandLubrication
Specificationsinthischapterfortheappropriateoil
filterandengineoilrefillquantity.
*
[SV18000(ALL)06/95] 6.Removetheengineoildipstick(highlightedinyellow)to
preventoilcontaminationoftheengineventilatingsystem
whilerefilling.
*
[SV18100(ALL)06/95] 7.RefilltheenginewithaCERTIFIEDengineoilofthe
preferredviscosity.Starttheengineandcheckforleaks.
FollowdirectionsinCheckingandaddingengineoiltobesure
theengineisfilledtotheproperlevel.
*
[SV18300(ALL)07/95]
WARNING
ContinuouscontactwithUSEDmotoroilhascaused
cancerinlaboratorymice.
*
[SV18310(ALL)07/95]
Protectyourskinbywashingwithsoapandwater.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
314
%
*
[SV18400(ALL)03/95] Engine Coolant
%
*
[SV18500(ALL)09/95]
Checking the Engine Coolant
*
[SV18550(ALL)08/95]
NOTE: Be sure to read and understand Precautions When
Servicing Your Vehicle at the beginning of this chapter.
[SV18600(ALL)01/93]
Your vehicle’s engine coolant protects the engine from
overheating in the summer and from freezing in the winter.
Check the level of the engine coolant at least once a month, but
preferably each time you stop for fuel. Simply check the coolant
reservoir, located in the engine compartment. The coolant
should stay between the MIN and MAX marks. It will be closer
to MAX when the engine is warm and closer to MIN when the
engine is cold. To locate the coolant reservoir, see the diagram
of your vehicle’s engine under Engine Compartment in this
chapter.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
ServicingYourVillager
315
*
[SV18700(ALL)09/95]
AddingEngineCoolant
[SV18800(ALL)02/95]
17-1/2pica
art:0040197-C
Enginecoolantrecoveryreservoir
*
[SV18900(ALL)09/95]
WARNING
Donotputenginecoolantinthecontainerforthe
windshieldwasherfluid.
[SV19000(ALL)05/96]
Whentheengineiscool,adda50/50mixtureofenginecoolant
andwatertotheenginecoolantrecoveryreservoir—DONOT
ADDDIRECTLYTOTHERADIATOR.Addstraightwateronly
inanemergency,butyoushouldreplaceitwitha50/50
mixtureofcoolantanddistilledwaterassoonaspossible.
[SV19100(ALL)05/96]
Checkthecoolantlevelinthecoolantrecoveryreservoirthe
nextfewtimesyoudrivethevehicle.Ifnecessary,addenough
ofa50/50mixtureofcoolantandwatertobringtheliquid
leveltothefilllineonthereservoir.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
316
[SV19150(ALL)05/96]
WARNING
Neverremovethecoolantrecoverycapwhiletheengine
isrunningorhot.
[SV19200(ALL)05/96]
Ifyoumustremovethecoolantrecoverycap,followthesesteps
toavoidpersonalinjurycausedbyescapingsteamorengine
coolant:
[SV19225(ALL)05/96] 1.Beforeyouremovethecap,turntheengineoffandletit
cool.
[SV19250(ALL)05/96] 2.Whentheengineiscool,wrapathickclotharoundthecap
andturnitslowly,counterclockwisetothefirststop.
[SV19275(ALL)05/96] 3.Stepbackwhilethepressurereleases.
[SV19300(ALL)05/96] 4.Whenyouaresurethatallthepressurehasbeenreleased,
usetheclothtopressthecapdown,turnitcounterclockwise,
andremoveit.
[SV19400(ALL)05/96]
UseFordPremiumEngineCoolantE2FZ-19549-AA(inCanada,
MotorcraftCXC-8-B)oranequivalentpremiumenginecoolant
thatmeetsFordSpecificationESE-M97B44-A.FordPremium
EngineCoolantisanoptimizedformulathatwillprotectall
metalsandrubberelastomersusedinFordcoolingsystemsfor4
yearsor50,000miles(80,000km).
[SV19500(ALL)05/96]
Donotusealcoholormethanolantifreezeoranyengine
coolantsmixedwithalcoholormethanolantifreeze.Donotuse
supplementalcoolantadditivesinyourvehicle.Theseadditives
mayharmyourenginecoolingsystem.Theuseofanimproper
coolantmayvoidthewarrantyofyourvehicle’senginecooling
system.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
317
[SV19600(ALL)05/96]
Recycled engine coolant
[SV19700(ALL)05/96]
Ford Motor Company recommends that Ford and
Lincoln-Mercury dealers use recycled engine coolant produced
by Ford-approved processes. Not all coolant recycling processes
produce coolant which meets Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A,
and use of such coolant may harm engine and cooling system
components.
[SV19800(ALL)05/96]
Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for
recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.
[SV19900(ALL)05/96]
Coolant refill capacity
[SV19950(ALL)05/96]
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can
hold, see Refill capacities for fluids in the Index.
[SV20000(ALL)05/96]
Have your dealer check the engine cooling system for leaks if
you have to add more than a quart (liter) of engine coolant per
month.
[SV20100(ALL)05/96]
Severe winter climate
[SV20200(ALL)05/96]
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than -34˚F [-36˚C]),
it may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above
50%. Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle is such that the coolant
will not freeze at the temperature level in which you drive
during winter months. Never increase the engine coolant
concentration above 60%. Leave a 50/50 mixture of engine
coolant and water in your vehicle year-round in non-extreme
climates.
[SV20300(ALL)05/96]
Checking hoses
[SV20400(ALL)05/96]
Inspect all engine and heater system hoses for deterioration,
leaks and loose clamps before adding or replacing engine
coolant. Make whatever repairs or replacements are necessary
using Motorcraft parts or their equivalents.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
318
%
*
[SV21300(ALL)08/95]
EngineCoolantDrainandFlush
[SV21400(ALL)01/93]
Tohaveyourenginecoolantdrained,seeyourForddealeror
refertotheprocedureintheServiceManual.
*
[SV21420(ALL)04/95] AirFilter
[SV21440(ALL)09/93]
10-1/2pica
art:0040278-A
Airfilterhousing
[SV21460(ALL)09/93]
Theairfiltershouldnotbecleanedandreused.Replaceit
accordingtothemaintenanceintervalsshownintheMaintenance
ScheduleandRecordbooklet.Whenreplacingthefilter,unclipthe
fourclampsandremovethefilter.Wipetheinsideoftheair
filterhousingwithadampclothwhenreplacingthefilter.
*
[SV21480(ALL)01/95]
WARNING
Neverpourfuelinthethrottlebodyorattempttostart
theenginewiththeaircleanerremoved.Doingsocould
resultinfireandpersonalinjury.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
ServicingYourVillager
319
%
*
[SV21500(ALL)03/95] WindshieldWasherFluidandWipers
%
*
[SV21600(ALL)03/95]
WasherFluid
[SV21700(ALL)01/93]
Checkthelevelofthewindshieldwasherfluideverytimeyou
stopforfuel,orwhenthewarninglightindicateslowwasher
fluid.Thereservoirforwasherfluidislocatedintheengine
compartment.Thisreservoircontainsthefluidforboththe
windshieldandliftgatewashers.
*
[SV21900(ALL)05/95]
WARNING
Donotputwindshieldwasherfluidinthecontainerfor
theenginecoolant.
*
[SV21910(ALL)09/95]
Ifsprayedtocleantheglass,enginecoolantorantifreezecould
makeitdifficulttoseethroughthewindshield.
[SV22000(ALL)09/93]
17-1/2pica
art:0040198-B
Windshieldwasherfluidreservoir
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
320
%
*
[SV22100(ALL)01/95]
Use specially formulated windshield washer fluid rather than
plain water, because specially formulated washer fluids contain
additives that dissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washer
fluids containing an appropriate antifreeze such as methanol
should be used in freezing weather (temperatures below 32˚F
[0˚C]). State or local regulations on Volatile Organic Compounds
(VOC’s) may restrict use of the most common antifreeze,
methanol. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper
blades, and windshield washer system.
%
*
[SV22300(ALL)03/95]
Wiper Blades
*
[SV22400(ALL)03/95]
Check the windshield wiper blades at least twice a year. Also
check them whenever they seem less effective than usual.
Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments used
by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper
blades.
*
[SV22500(ALL)09/95]
If the blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield
and the wiper blades. Use undiluted windshield washer solution
or a mild detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Do not
use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents to clean your
wiper blades. These will damage your blades.
*
[SV22600(ALL)04/95]
To reach the wiper blades easily, turn the ignition switch to
ACCESSORY and turn your wipers on. Wait for them to reach a
vertical position and turn the ignition to OFF. Moving the
wipers manually may damage them.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
321
*
[SV22700(ALL)03/01]
Wiper blade replacement
*
[SV22800(ALL)01/95]
If the wipers still do not work properly after you clean them,
you may need to replace the wiper blade assembly. When
replacing the wiper blade assembly always use a Motorcraft part
or equivalent.
*
[SV22900(ALL)10/93]
To replace the wiper blades:
*
[SV23000(ALL)06/95] 1. Pull the wiper arm away from the windshield and into the
lock position.
[SV23100(ALL)04/95] 2. Turn the blade at an angle from the wiper arm. Push the
lock pin to release the blade and pull the wiper blade down
toward the windshield to remove it from the arm.
*
[SV23200(ALL)03/94] 3. Attach a new wiper blade to the wiper arm and press it into
place until you hear it click.
[SV23300(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040235-B
Replacing the wiper blades
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
322
%
*
[SV23400(ALL)03/95] Tires
*
[SV23500(ALL)03/95]
Lookatyourtireseachtimeyoufillyourfueltank.Ifonetire
lookslowerthantheothers,checkthepressureinallofthem.
Alwaysfollowtheseprecautions:
*
[SV23600(ALL)03/95]
■Keepyourtiresinflatedtotherecommendedpressures.
*
[SV23700(ALL)01/93]
■Staywithintherecommendedloadlimits.SeeDrivingwitha
heavyloadintheIndex.
*
[SV23800(ALL)02/95]
■Makesuretheweightofyourloadisevenlydistributed.
*
[SV23900(ALL)10/89]
■Driveatsafespeeds.
*
[SV24000(ALL)01/95]
Ifyoudonottaketheseprecautions,yourtiresmayfailorgo
flat.
*
[SV24100(ALL)01/93]
WARNING
Alwaysobeypostedspeedlimits.Ifyoudrivetoofast
forroadconditions,youcouldlosecontrolofyour
vehicle.Undersomecircumstances,drivingatveryhigh
speedsforextendedperiodsoftimemaydamagevehicle
components,creatingariskofcomponentfailureanda
potentiallossofvehiclecontrol.Anytimeyoulose
controlofyourvehicle,itmayresultininjury.
[SV24300(ALL)07/95]
Atleastonceamonth,checkthepressureinallyourvehicle’s
tires,includingthespare.Useanaccuratetirepressuregauge.
Checkthetirepressurewhentiresarecold,afterthevehiclehas
beenparkedforatleastonehourorhasbeendrivenlessthan3
miles(5km).Youcanfindthepropercoldtirepressureonthe
TirePressureDecal,locatedintheglovecompartment.
*
[SV24400(ALL)05/95]
WARNING
Improperlyinflatedtirescanaffectvehiclehandlingand
canfailsuddenly,possiblyresultinginlossofvehicle
control.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
323
%
*
[SV24500(ALL)08/95]
Tire Inspection and Maintenance
*
[SV24600(ALL)02/95]
Inspect the tire treads, and remove stones, nails, glass or other
objects that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check for
holes or cuts that may permit air to leak from the tire, and
make the necessary repairs.
*
[SV24700(ALL)05/95]
Inspect the tire sidewalls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If
you suspect internal damage to the tire, have it removed and
checked. You may need to repair or replace it.
%
*
[SV24800(ALL)02/95]
Tire Rotation
*
[SV24900(ALL)03/95]
Because your vehicle’s front and rear tires perform different
jobs, they often wear differently. To make sure your tires wear
evenly and last longer, rotate them at the mileage shown in the
Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet which came with your
vehicle.
*
[SV25000(ALL)03/90]
In situations where the tires differ from front to rear
(snow/traction), simply rotate using a side to side pattern.
[SV25100(ALL)09/93]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040199-B
Rotating the tires
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
324
[SV25200(ALL)07/95]
Aftereachrotation,adjustindividualtirepressureasspecified
ontheTirePressureDecal.Tightenwheellugnutstothe
requiredtorquespecificationandretightenagainafter500miles
(800km).
*
[SV25300(ALL)01/93]
Ifyourvehiclehastheoptionalfull-sizesparetire,youmay
rotatethesparetireintotherotationpattern.
[SV25400(ALL)05/95]
WARNING
Ifyouusethetemporarysparetirecontinuouslyordo
notfollowtheseprecautions,thetirecouldfail,causing
youtolosecontrolofthevehicle.
[SV25500(ALL)01/93]
Ifyourvehiclehasaluminumwheels,youmayremovethe
sparetirefromthewheelandremountitonanaluminum
wheeltorotatethesparetireintoyourvehicle’srotation
pattern.
%
*
[SV25600(ALL)04/95]
ReplacingtheTires
*
[SV25700(ALL)01/93]
Replacetiresthatshowwearbands.Whenyourtireshowsa
wearband,ithasonly1/16ofaninch(1.59mm)oftreadleft.
*
[SV25800(ALL)11/93]
7-1/2picaart:0040200-A
Aworn-outtire
*
[SV25900(ALL)01/95]
Becauseyourvehicle’stiresmaywearunevenly,youmayneed
toreplacethembeforeawearbandappearsacrosstheentire
tread.Somespotswearmoreheavilythanothers.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
ServicingYourVillager
325
*
[SV26000(ALL)03/90]
Yourwheelsandtiresarematch-mountedforimprovedride.
Beforeyoubegintorepairatire,markthewheelandtireso
thattheyareproperlyalignedwhenremounted.Thiswill
ensurethatthetireswillcontinuetogiveyouthesameride
level.
*
[SV26100(ALL)01/95]
WARNING
Whenreplacingfullsizetires,nevermixradial,
bias-belted,orbias-typetires.Useonlythetiresizesthat
arelistedonthetirepressuredecal.Makesurethatall
tiresarethesamesize,speedrating,andload-carrying
capacity.Useonlythetirecombinationsrecommendedon
thedecal.Ifyoudonotfollowtheseprecautions,your
vehiclemaynotdriveproperlyandsafely.
*
[SV26200(ALL)03/90]
WARNING
Makesurethatallreplacementtiresareofthesamesize,
type,load-carryingcapacity,andtreaddesign(e.g.“All
Terrain”,etc.),asoriginallyofferedbyFord.
*
[SV26300(ALL)05/95]
WARNING
Failuretofollowtheseprecautionsmayadverselyaffect
thehandlingofthevehicleandmakeiteasiertolose
controlandrollover.
*
[SV26400(ALL)01/93]
Tiresthatarelargerorsmallerthanyourvehicle’soriginaltires
mayaffecttheaccuracyofyourspeedometerandodometer.
%
*
[SV26500(ALL)04/95]
WheelandTireMatching
*
[SV26510(ALL)03/95]
Seeanauthorizedtiredealerforproperservicingprocedures.
Wheelsandtiresmustbeproperlyremoved,matchedand
remountedtomaintainthebestpossibleride.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
326
%
*
[SV27400(ALL)02/95]
Information About Tire Quality Grades
*
[SV27500(ALL)01/95]
New vehicles are fitted with tires that have their Tire Quality
Grade (described below) molded into the tire’s sidewall. These
Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the
United States Department of Transportation has set.
*
[SV27600(ALL)12/93]
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on
this vehicle. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (254-305 mm) or
limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
*
[SV27700(ALL)01/95]
U.S. Department of Transportation — Tire quality grades: The
U.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the
government has written it.
%
*
[SV27800(ALL)01/95]
Treadwear
*
[SV27900(ALL)01/95]
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
*
[SV28000(ALL)01/95]
Traction A B C
[SV28100(ALL)01/93]
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, and C,
and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
ServicingYourVillager
327
[SV28200(ALL)05/96]
WARNING
Thetractiongradeassignedtothistireisbasedon
braking(straightahead)tractiontestsanddoesnot
includecornering(turning)traction.
*
[SV28300(ALL)01/95]
TemperatureABC
[SV28400(ALL)01/93]
ThetemperaturegradesareA(thehighest),B,andC,
representingthetire’sresistancetothegenerationofheatand
itsabilitytodissipateheatwhentestedundercontrolled
conditionsonaspecifiedindoorlaboratorytestwheel.Sustained
hightemperaturecancausethematerialofthetireto
degenerateandreducetirelife,andexcessivetemperaturecan
leadtosuddentirefailure.ThegradeCcorrespondstoalevel
ofperformancewhichallpassengercartiresmustmeetunder
theFederalMotorVehicleSafetyStandardNo.109.GradesB
andArepresenthigherlevelsofperformanceonthelaboratory
testwheelthantheminimumrequiredbylaw.
[SV28490(ALL)06/95]
WARNING
Thetemperaturegradeforthistireisestablishedfora
tirethatisproperlyinflatedandnotoverloaded.
[SV28500(ALL)06/95]
WARNING
Excessivespeed,underinflation,orexcessiveloadingcan
causeheatbuildupandpossibletirefailure.
[SV28600(ALL)01/93]
Theinformationonbrakingperformanceandtirequality
gradingfoundinthe“FordMotorCompanyPassengerCar
ConsumerInformation”pamphlet(FPS12024-92)alsoappliesto
theVillager.Thispublicationisavailablefromyourdealer.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
328
%
*
[SV28700(ALL)04/95]
SnowTiresandChains
*
[SV28800(ALL)01/95]
Thetiresonyourvehiclehaveall-weathertreadsthatprovide
tractioninrainorsnow.However,duringthewintermonthsin
someclimates,youmayneedtousesnowtiresandoccasionally
chainsforyourtires.
*
[SV28900(ALL)05/95]
WARNING
Whenusingsnowtires,makesuretheyarethesamesize
andgradeasthetiresyounormallyuseonyourvehicle.
*
[SV29000(ALL)02/95]
Donotusechainswhenusingatemporaryspare.Forfullsize
tires,usechainsonthetiresonlyinanemergencyorifthelaw
requiresthemwhereyoulive.Whenyouusethetirechains:
*
[SV29100(ALL)01/95]
■Makesurethechainsaretherightsizeforyourtires.Use
onlySAEClass“S”chains.Othertypesmaydamageyour
vehicle.
*
[SV29200(ALL)01/93]
■Putchainsontightlywiththeendshelddownsecurely.
Followthechainmanufacturer’sinstructions.
*
[SV29300(ALL)01/95]
■Driveslowly.Ifyoucanhearthechainsruborbangagainst
yourvehicle,stopthevehicleandtightenthechains.Ifyou
continuetohearthechainsruborbangagainstyourvehicle,
removethechainstopreventdamagetoyourvehicle.
*
[SV29400(ALL)10/94]
■Avoidfullyloadingyourvehicleifpossible.
*
[SV29500(ALL)05/94]
■Removetirechainsatthefirstopportunityafterusingthem
onsnowandice.Donotusethechainsondryroads.
*
[SV29600(ALL)01/93]
Makesureyoursuspensioninsulatorsandbumpersarenot
missingorworntoavoiddamagetoyourvehicle.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
329
%
*
[SV29650(ALL)04/95]
Cleaning the Wheels
*
[SV29675(ALL)05/95]
Wash the wheels with the same detergent you use to wash your
vehicle’s body. Do not use acid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool,
abrasives, fuel, or strong detergents. These substances will
damage protective coatings. Use tar and road oil remover to
remove grease and tar.
*
[SV29700(ALL)04/95]
If you have whitewall tires that are difficult to clean with
regular detergent, use whitewall tire cleaner. Follow the
directions on the container and rinse the tires with plenty of
clean water.
*
[SV29725(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out if the brushes are
abrasive.
%
*
[SV29800(ALL)03/95] Battery
[SV29900(ALL)05/96]
The Motorcraft low-maintenance battery requires periodic
service as detailed below. The low-maintenance battery has
removable vent caps for checking the electrolyte level and for
adding water, if needed. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep
the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the
battery cables are tightly fastened to the battery terminals.
[SV30000(ALL)05/96]
If you see any corrosion on the battery cables or terminals,
remove the cables from the terminal and clean them both with a
wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water. Reinstall the cables when you are done
cleaning them, and apply a small quantity of grease to the top
of each battery terminal to help prevent corrosion.
*
[SV30100(ALL)07/95]
Battery replacement
[SV30200(ALL)05/96]
If your original equipment battery requires replacement while
under warranty, it may be replaced by a Motorcraft
low-maintenance battery. The low-maintenance battery has
removable vent caps for checking the electrolyte level and for
adding water, if needed.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
330
[SV30300(ALL)05/96]
Checktheelectrolytelevelofeachcell(therearesix)atleast
every12monthsor12,000miles(20,000km).Keepthe
electrolytelevelbetweentheMAXandMINlinesthatareon
thesideofthebattery(youwillhavetoremovethebattery
covertoseethefilllinesonthebattery).Donotoverfillthe
batterycells.Whenoperatingatambienttemperaturesabove
90˚F(32˚C),checktheelectrolytelevelmorefrequently.
[SV30400(ALL)05/96]
Iftheleveloftheelectrolyteinacellofthebatteryislow,add
distilledwateruntiltheproperlevelineachcellisrestored.
Plaintapwaterwillwork;butifitis“hardwater”havinga
highmineraloralkalicontent,thelifeofthebatterymaybe
reducedandthefrequencyofmaintenancerequiredonthe
batterywillincrease.
%
*
[SV30500(ALL)03/95]
HelpUsProtectOurEnvironment
*
[SV30600(ALL)04/95]
FordMotorCompanystronglyrecommendsthatusedlead-acid
batteriesbereturnedtoanauthorizedrecyclingfacilityfor
disposal.
*
[SV30700(ALL)02/95]
7-1/2picaart:0040201-A
Batteryrecyclingsymbol
*
[SV30800(ALL)02/95]
WARNING
Thegasesaroundthebatterycanexplodeifexposedto
flames,sparks,orlitcigarettes.Anexplosioncouldresult
ininjuryorvehicledamage.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
ServicingYourVillager
331
*
[SV30900(ALL)02/95]
WARNING
Toprotectyourselfwhenchargingabattery,always
shieldyourfaceandeyes.Makesurethatyoucan
breathefreshair.
%
*
[SV31000(ALL)07/95]
WARNING
Batteriescontainsulfuricacidwhichburnsskin,eyes,
andclothing.
*
[SV31010(ALL)07/95]
Iftheacidtouchessomeone’sskin,eyes,orclothing,
immediatelyflushtheareawithwaterforatleast15minutes.If
someoneswallowstheacid,havehimorherdrinklotsofmilk
orwaterfirst,thenMilkofMagnesia,abeatenegg,orvegetable
oil.Calladoctorimmediately.
%
*
[SV31200(ALL)06/95]
WARNING
Applyingtoomuchpressureontheendswhenliftinga
batterycouldcauseacidtospill.Liftthebatterywitha
carrierorwithyourhandsontheoppositecorners.
%
*
[SV31300(ALL)05/95] AutomaticTransaxleFluid
[SV31400(ALL)01/93]
Undernormalcircumstances,youdonotneedtocheckthefluid
levelofthetransaxlesinceyourvehicledoesnotuseup
transaxlefluid.However,ifthetransaxleisnotworking
properly,(forexample,slippingorshiftingslowly),oryou
noticesomesignoffluidleakage,thefluidlevelshouldbe
checked.
*
[SV31500(ALL)06/95]
Itisbesttocheckthetransaxlefluidlevelatnormaloperating
temperature,afterapproximately20miles(30km)ofdriving.
However,ifnecessary,youcancheckthefluidlevelwithout
havingtodrive20miles(30km)toobtainanormaloperating
temperatureifoutsidetemperaturesareabove50˚F(10˚C).
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
332
*
[SV31600(ALL)09/95]
NOTE:Ifthevehiclehasbeenoperatedforanextended
periodathighspeedsorincitytrafficduringhot
weather,orifithasbeenpullingatrailer,theengine
shouldbeturnedoffforabout30minutestoallow
thefluidtocoolbeforechecking.
%
*
[SV31700(ALL)02/93]
CheckingtheAutomaticTransaxleFluid
*
[SV31800(ALL)06/95]
Withthevehicleonalevelsurface,starttheengineandmove
thegearshiftleverthroughallofthegearrangesallowing
sufficienttimeforeachpositiontoengage.Securelylatchthe
gearshiftleverintheP(Park)position,fullysettheparking
brakeandleavetheenginerunning.
*
[SV32000(ALL)02/95]
Wipeoffthedipstickcap,pullthedipstickoutandwipethe
indicatorendclean.Putthedipstickbackintothefillertubeand
makesureitisfullyseated.Pullthedipstickoutandreadthe
fluidlevel.
[SV32100(ALL)04/94]
Whencheckingfluidatnormaloperatingtemperature,thefluid
levelshouldbewithinthecrosshatchedareaonthedipstick.
Whenthevehiclehasnotbeendriven,andoutsidetemperature
isabove50˚F(10˚C),thefluidlevelshouldbebetweenthe
notchesonthedipstick.
[SV32150(ALL)02/95]
WARNING
Yourvehicleshouldnotbedrivenifthetransaxlefluid
levelisbelowthebottomnotchonthedipstick.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
333
[SV32200(ALL)09/93]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040202-B
Automatic transaxle fluid dipstick
%
*
[SV32300(ALL)01/95]
Adding Automatic Transaxle Fluid
*
[SV32400(ALL)04/95]
The fluid type is stamped on the dipstick. Before adding any
fluid, be sure that the correct type will be used.
*
[SV32500(ALL)06/95]
Add fluid in 1/2 pint (0.25 liter) increments through the filler
tube to bring the level to the correct area on the dipstick. If an
overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified
technician.
%
*
[SV32600(ALL)05/96]
NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a
responsible manner. Follow your community’s
standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call
your local recycling center to find out about recycling
automotive fluids.
*
[SV32700(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Always use Motorcraft MERCONH or equivalent
MERCONH automatic transaxle fluid when you refill
your automatic transaxle fluid.
%
*
[SV32800(ALL)02/95]
Brake Fluid
*
[SV32900(ALL)05/90]
Your vehicle is equipped with a brake fluid level indicator in
the master cylinder which lights the BRAKE warning light on
the instrument panel when the brake fluid level is low.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
334
*
[SV33000(ALL)03/95]
Undernormalcircumstances,yourvehicleshouldnotuseup
brakefluidrapidly.However,expectthelevelofthebrakefluid
toslowlyfallasyouputmoremileageonyourvehicleandthe
brakepadswear.
*
[SV33100(ALL)08/95]
Checkthebrakefluidatleastonceayear.Youcandothisby
lookingatthefluidlevelintheplasticbrakefluidreservoiron
themastercylinder.Thefluidlevelshouldbeatornearthe
MAXmark.
*
[SV33200(ALL)05/95]
WARNING
Brakefluidistoxic.
*
[SV33210(ALL)07/95]
Ifbrakefluidcontactseyes,flusheyeswithrunningwaterfor
15minutes.Getmedicalattentionifirritationpersists.Iftaken
internally,drinkwaterandinducevomiting.Getmedical
attentionimmediately.
%
*
[SV33300(ALL)02/95]
Ifthefluidislow,carefullycleanandremovethefillercap
fromthereservoir.FillthereservoirtotheMAXlinewithFord
HighPerformanceDOT3BrakeFluidC6AZ-19542-AAorDOT
3equivalentfluidmeetingFordspecificationESA-M6C25-A.
*
[SV33600(ALL)01/95]
WARNING
IfyouuseabrakefluidthatisnotDOT3,youwill
causepermanentdamagetoyourbrakes.
*
[SV33700(ALL)01/95]
DonotfillthereservoirabovetheMAXline.
*
[SV33800(ALL)01/95]
Ifyoufindthatthefluidlevelisexcessivelylow—belowthe
seamorridgeontheoutsideoftheplasticreservoir—havethe
brakesysteminspected.
*
[SV33900(ALL)01/95]
WARNING
Donotletthereservoirforthemastercylinderrundry.
Thismaycausethebrakestofail.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
335
[SV34000(ALL)09/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040205-C
Brake fluid master cylinder reservoir
%
*
[SV34100(ALL)03/95] Power Steering Fluid
*
[SV34200(ALL)01/95]
Check the level of the power steering fluid at least twice a
year (i.e., every Spring and Fall).
%
*
[SV34300(ALL)03/95]
Checking and Adding Power Steering Fluid
*
[SV34400(ALL)02/95] 1. Start the engine and let it run until the power steering fluid
reaches normal operating temperature. The power steering
fluid will be at the right temperature when the engine
coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster is near
the center of the NORMAL operating temperature range.
*
[SV34500(ALL)01/95] 2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel back and
forth several times. Make sure that the cap assembly is
installed at this time.
*
[SV34600(ALL)03/93] 3. Then turn the engine off.
*
[SV34700(ALL)01/93] 4. Check the fluid level in the power steering fluid reservoir.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
336
[SV34800(ALL)09/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040206-B
Power steering fluid reservoir
[SV34900(ALL)05/95] 5. If the power steering fluid is low, add fluid in small
amounts, continuously checking the level, until the fluid is
between the minimum (MIN) and maximum (MAX) lines on
the reservoir. Do not overfill. To find out how much fluid
your vehicle’s reservoir for the power steering fluid will
hold, see Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts, and Lubricant
Specifications later in this chapter.
*
[SV35000(ALL)06/94]
Use only power steering fluid that meets Ford Specification
ESW-M2C33-F, such as Ford Premium Power Steering Fluid,
E6AZ-19582-AA or an equivalent Type F Automatic Transaxle
Fluid with a Ford registration number (an 8-digit number
beginning with “2P” printed on the fluid container).
*
[SV35100(ALL)03/95]
NOTE: If the power steering fluid is low, do not drive your
vehicle for a long period of time before adding fluid.
This can damage the power steering pump.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
337
*
[SV35200(ALL)01/93]
If you must check the power steering fluid when it is cold,
make sure that the fluid reaches at least the minimum (MIN)
mark. The reading will only be accurate if the fluid temperature
is approximately 70˚ to 100˚F (21˚ to 38˚C).
%
*
[SV35300(ALL)04/95] Fuses, Fuse Links and Circuit Breakers
[SV35400(ALL)05/95]
Fuses, fuse links and circuit breakers protect your vehicle’s
electrical system from overloading. If electrical parts in your
vehicle are not working, the system may have been overloaded
causing a blown fuse or tripped circuit breaker. Before you
replace or repair any electrical parts, check the appropriate fuses
or circuit breakers.
[SV35500(ALL)01/93]
The following charts tell you which fuses or circuit breakers
protect each electrical part of your vehicle. If a fuse blows or a
circuit breaker trips (opens) a circuit, all the parts of your
vehicle that use that circuit will not work.
*
[SV35600(ALL)06/95]
Once you have determined which fuses or circuit breakers to
check, follow the procedures under Checking and replacing fuses
or Checking and replacing circuit breakers later in this chapter.
[SV35700(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Fuse links should only be repaired by your Ford or
Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
338
%
*
[SV35800(ALL)06/95]
Checking and Replacing Fuses
*
[SV35900(ALL)01/93]
If you need to check a fuse, find the fuse panel for the electrical
system, which is located under the instrument panel, and follow
these steps:
*
[SV36000(ALL)09/93] 1. To remove the fuse panel cover, pull down on the fuse panel
cover handle.
[SV36100(ALL)06/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040203-B
The instrument panel fuse panel
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
339
*
[SV36200(ALL)06/95] 2. On the fuse panel cover, find the number of the fuse you
want to check. The diagram on the cover tells you where to
locate the fuse on the panel.
[SV36250(ALL)06/95]
24 pica art:0040217-I
The fuse panel cover
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
340
[SV36300(ALL)06/95]
twenty-six pica
chart:0040300-B
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
341
[SV36325(ALL)05/96]
thirty-four pica
chart:0040239-G
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
342
[SV36350(ALL)07/95]
twenty pica
chart:0040240-D
*
[SV36400(ALL)06/95] 3. Check the fuse to see if it is blown. Look through the clear
side of the fuse to see if the metal wire inside is separated. If
it is, the fuse is blown and should be replaced.
*
[SV36500(ALL)09/93]
7-1/2 pica art:0040210-B
Fuse puller tool and fuse
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
ServicingYourVillager
343
[SV36600(ALL)01/93] 4.Usethefusepullertooltoremovetheblownfuseand
replacethefusewithonethathastherightamperagerating
(seethefusepanelcoverforamperageratings).
*
[SV36700(ALL)08/95]
WARNING
Alwaysreplaceafusewithonethathasthespecified
amperagerating.Usingafusewithahigheramperage
ratingcancauseseverewiredamageandcouldstarta
fire.
*
[SV36800(ALL)06/95] 5.Putthefusepanelcoverbackon.
*
[SV36850(ALL)01/95]
Evenafteryoureplaceafuse,itwillcontinuetoblowifyoudo
notfindwhatcausedtheoverload.Ifthefusecontinuesto
blow,haveyourelectricalsystemchecked.
*
[SV36900(ALL)03/94]
Thefollowingchartindicatesthecolorsandamperageratingsof
standardfuses.
[SV36950(ALL)09/93]
twelvepica
chart:0040237-A
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
344
%
*
[SV37000(ALL)01/93]
Engine Compartment Main Fuse Panel
[SV37100(ALL)06/95]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040303-A
Engine compartment main fuse panel
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
345
[SV37150(ALL)06/95]
twenty-two pica
chart:0040241-D
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
346
[SV37250(ALL)06/95]
eighteen pica
chart:0040328-A
%
*
[SV37900(ALL)03/95]
Circuit Breakers
[SV38000(ALL)01/93]
If you need to check a circuit breaker that is on the fuse panel,
see Fuses, checking and replacing in the Index to find out how to
locate the fuse panel.
[SV38100(ALL)01/93]
Since you need diagnostic equipment to check whether a circuit
breaker works and such equipment comes with instructions, we
do not discuss how to check circuit breakers. If you have
questions about circuit breakers or how to check them, see your
Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
*
[SV38200(ALL)10/92]
However, you should know that the circuit breakers will reset
themselves and allow the electrical parts to work again once the
overload on the circuit is removed. If the circuit breakers
continue to cut off electricity, have your vehicle’s electrical
system checked.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
347
[SV38300(ALL)06/95]
If you replace a circuit breaker, use one with the same
amperage rating. To remove a circuit breaker mounted by the
fuse panel, grip it with your finger and thumb and pull it
straight out of its socket.
%
*
[SV38400(ALL)10/94]
Relays
[SV38500(ALL)05/95]
Relays are devices which receive signals from components or
systems. After receiving signals, relays transfer these signals to
activate or deactivate other components or systems. A relay box
is located near the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
[SV38600(ALL)06/95]
10-1/2 pica art:0040207-F
The relay box
[SV38650(ALL)06/95]
ten pica chart:0040243-E
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
348
%
*
[SV38700(ALL)03/95] Lights and Bulb Replacement
*
[SV38800(ALL)01/95]
It is a good idea to check the operation of the following lights
frequently:
*
[SV38900(ALL)01/95]
■ headlamps
*
[SV38950(ALL)02/95]
■ high-mount brakelamp
*
[SV39000(ALL)01/95]
■ tail lamps
*
[SV39100(ALL)01/95]
■ brakelamps
*
[SV39200(ALL)01/95]
■ hazard flasher
*
[SV39300(ALL)01/95]
■ turn signals
*
[SV39400(ALL)01/95]
■ license plate lamp
%
*
[SV39500(ALL)01/95]
The alignment of your headlamps should be checked if:
*
[SV39600(ALL)01/95]
■ oncoming motorists frequently signal you to turn off your
vehicle’s high beams when you do not have the high beams
on
*
[SV39700(ALL)01/95]
■ the headlamps do not seem to give you enough light to see
clearly at night
*
[SV39800(ALL)01/93]
■ the headlamp beams are not pointed slightly down and to
the right
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
ServicingYourVillager
349
%
*
[SV39900(ALL)03/95]
HeadlampBulb
*
[SV40000(ALL)01/95]
Theheadlampsonyourvehicleusereplaceablebulbs.Whenthe
lampburnsout,simplyreplacethebulb,ratherthanthewhole
lamp.
*
[SV40100(ALL)05/95]
WARNING
Handleahalogenheadlampbulbcarefullyandkeepout
ofchildren’sreach.Graspthebulbonlybyitsplastic
baseanddonottouchtheglass.Theoilfromyourhand
couldcausethebulbtobreakthenexttimethe
headlampsareoperated.
*
[SV40200(ALL)01/93]
Donotremovetheburnedoutbulbunlessyoucanimmediately
replaceitwithanewone.Ifabulbisremovedforanextended
periodoftime,contaminantsmayentertheheadlampandaffect
itsperformance.
*
[SV40300(ALL)03/95]
Removing the headlamp bulb
*
[SV40400(ALL)01/93] 1.Makesurethattheengineisoffandtheheadlampswitchon
theinstrumentpanelisintheOFFposition.
[SV40500(ALL)01/93] 2.Removetheelectricalconnectorfromthebulbbypullingthe
connectorawayfromthebulbassembly.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
350
[SV40600(ALL)09/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040222-B
The headlamp bulb assembly
[SV40700(ALL)01/93] 3. Remove the bulb retaining ring by turning it
counterclockwise 1/8 of a turn to free it from the socket.
Then slide the ring off the plastic base. Keep the ring. You
must use it again to hold the new bulb in place.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
351
[SV40800(ALL)09/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040211-A
Removing the headlamp bulb retaining ring
*
[SV40900(ALL)04/95] 4. Carefully remove the bulb assembly from its socket by
gently pulling it rearward without turning.
*
[SV41000(ALL)01/93] 5. Do not touch the bulb with your skin or you could shatter
the bulb. Always grasp the bulb assembly from the plastic
base.
*
[SV41100(ALL)01/93] 6. Be sure that you have the proper replacement bulb ready
before you discard the burned out bulb.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
352
[SV41200(ALL)09/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040212-A
Headlamp bulb replacement
*
[SV41300(ALL)03/95]
Installing the headlamp bulb
*
[SV41400(ALL)01/93] 1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic base facing upward,
insert the glass end of the bulb into the socket. You may
need to turn the bulb left or right to line up the grooves in
the plastic base with the tabs in the socket. When the
grooves are aligned, push the bulb into the socket until the
plastic base contacts the rear of the socket. Do not touch the
glass with your fingers.
[SV41500(ALL)01/93] 2. Slip the retaining ring over the plastic base until it contacts
the rear of the socket. Lock the ring into the socket by
rotating it until you feel a “stop.”
*
[SV41600(ALL)01/93] 3. Push the electrical connector into the rear of the plastic base
until it snaps, locking it into place.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
353
*
[SV41700(ALL)09/89] 4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure that they work
properly. If the headlamp was correctly aligned before you
changed bulbs, you should not need to align it again.
[SV41800(ALL)01/93]
Replacing the Bulbs
[SV41900(ALL)01/93]
There are several different types of replacement bulbs for your
vehicle. The following illustration indicates the proper method
of removal and installation for each bulb.
[SV42000(ALL)09/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040234-B
The replacement bulbs
[SV42100(ALL)01/93]
The illustrations in this section will provide you with reference
for changing many of the bulbs on your vehicle.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
354
[SV42200(ALL)06/95]
33-1/2 pica
art:0040220-G
Bulb locations
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
355
%
*
[SV42300(ALL)01/93]
Bulb replacement chart
[SV42400(ALL)04/95]
twenty-two pica
chart:0040213-F
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
356
[SV42500(ALL)04/94]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040230-B
[SV42600(ALL)01/93]
10-1/2 pica
art:0040229-B
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
357
[SV42700(ALL)01/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040227-A
[SV42701(ALL)05/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040232-C
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
358
[SV42801(ALL)05/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040228-A
[SV42851(ALL)05/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040226-A
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
359
[SV42860(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040327-A
[SV42875(ALL)04/94]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040233-C
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
360
[SV42900(ALL)01/93]
17-1/2 pica
art:0040225-B
[SV42905(ALL)06/95]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040223-B
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
361
[SV43000(ALL)01/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040224-B
[SV43075(ALL)01/93]
13-1/2 pica
art:0040231-B
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
362
%
*
[SV43100(ALL)03/95] EmissionControlSystem
*
[SV43200(ALL)12/95]
Yourvehicleisequippedwithacatalyticconverterwhich
enablesyourvehicletocomplywithapplicableexhaustemission
requirements.
*
[SV43210(ALL)06/95]
WARNING
Exhaustleaksmayresultintheentryofharmfuland
potentiallylethalfumesintothepassengercompartment.
Underextremeconditionsexcessiveexhausttemperatures
coulddamagethefuelsystem,theinteriorfloorcovering,
orothervehiclecomponents,possiblycausingafire.
[SV43248(ALL)07/95]
Malfunctionsintheengineorexhaustsystemcanresultin
excessiveexhaustsystemtemperatures.Underextreme
conditions(forexample,towingatrailerupasteephillona
veryhotdaywithamalfunctioningengineorexhaustsystem)
highexhaustsystemtemperaturescouldbedamaging.
[SV43250(ALL)05/95]
WARNING
Excessiveexhausttemperaturescoulddamagethefuel
system,theinteriorfloorcoveringorothervehicle
components,possiblycausingafire.
*
[SV43300(ALL)05/95]
Tomakesurethatthecatalyticconverterandtheotheremission
controlpartscontinuetoworkproperly:
*
[SV43400(ALL)01/95]
■Useonlyunleadedfuel.
*
[SV43500(ALL)01/95]
■Avoidrunningoutoffuel.
*
[SV43600(ALL)01/93]
■Neverturnofftheignitionwhileyourvehicleismoving,
especiallyathighspeeds.
*
[SV43700(ALL)03/95]
■HavetheserviceslistedinyourMaintenanceScheduleand
Recordbookletperformedaccordingtothespecifiedschedule.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
ServicingYourVillager
363
*
[SV43800(ALL)05/95]
WARNING
Donotpark,idle,ordriveyourvehicleindrygrassor
otherdrygroundcover.Theemissionsystemheatsup
theenginecompartmentandexhaustsystem,whichcan
startafire.
*
[SV43900(ALL)05/95]
WARNING
Donotremovethefloorcarpetinyourvehicle.Emission
controlscausehighexhausttemperaturesunderthefloor.
*
[SV44000(ALL)05/95]
Watchforfluidleaks,strangeodors,smokeandlossofoil
pressure.Alsowatchforthechargewarninglight,thecheck
enginelight,orthetemperaturewarninglight.Thesesometimes
indicatethattheemissionsystemisnotworkingproperly.
*
[SV44100(ALL)01/95]
Donotmakeanyunauthorizedchangestoyourvehicleor
engine.Changesthatcausemoreunburnedfueltoreachthe
exhaustsystemcanincreasethetemperatureoftheengineor
exhaustsystem.
%
*
[SV44150(ALL)06/95]
Ingeneral,maintenance,replacement,orserviceoftheemission
controldevicesorsystemsinyournewFordMotorCompany
vehicleorenginemaybeperformedatyourexpensebyany
automotiverepairestablishmentorindividualusingautomotive
partsequivalenttothosewithwhichyourvehicleorenginewas
originallyequipped.
*
[SV44200(ALL)01/93]
Bylaw,anyonewhomanufactures,repairs,services,sells,leases
vehicles,tradesvehicles,orsupervisesafleetofvehiclesisnot
permittedtointentionallyremoveanemissioncontroldeviceor
preventitfromworking.InsomeoftheUnitedStatesandin
Canada,vehicleownersmaybeliableiftheiremissioncontrol
deviceisremovedorispreventedfromworking.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
364
*
[SV44300(ALL)01/95]
Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operate properly. See
your dealer if the engine runs on for more than five seconds
after you shut it off or if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires.
*
[SV44400(ALL)11/93]
Information about your vehicle’s emissions control system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information decal located on or
near the engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and
gives some tune-up specifications.
%
*
[SV44405(ALL)07/95]
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance Testing
*
[SV44410(ALL)07/95]
In some localities it may become a legal requirement to pass an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the On-Board Diagnostic
(OBD) II system. If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery
has just been serviced, the OBD II system is reset to a not ready
for I/M testing condition. To prepare for I/M testing, the law
specifies a “need for additional mixed city and highway driving
to complete the check” of the OBD II system. As soon as all of
the OBD II system checks are successfully completed, the OBD
II system is set to the ready condition. The amount of driving
required to reach the ready condition varies with individual
driving patterns. To complete this requirement in the minimum
amount of time, refer to the OBD II Drive Cycle defined below.
If the vehicle owner cannot or does not want to do the
additional driving required by law, a service center can perform
this drive cycle as it would any other type of repair work.
*
[SV44415(ALL)09/95]
OBD II Drive Cycle
*
[SV44420(ALL)06/95]
The following steps must be run in the order shown. If any
steps are interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe
driving mode is acceptable between steps.
*
[SV44425(ALL)06/95]
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic
conditions and obey all traffic laws.
*
[SV44430(ALL)07/95]
The engine must be warmed up and at operating temperature
before proceeding with the drive modes of the following OBD II
Drive Cycle.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
365
*
[SV44435(ALL)06/95] 1. Start the engine. Drive or idle (in neutral) the vehicle for 4
minutes.
*
[SV44440(ALL)06/95] 2. Idle the vehicle in drive for 40 seconds.
*
[SV44445(ALL)07/95] 3. Accelerate the vehicle to 45 mph (70 km/h) at 1/4 to 1/2
throttle for 10 seconds.
*
[SV44450(ALL)07/95] 4. Drive the vehicle with a steady throttle at 45 mph
(70 km/h) for 30 seconds.
*
[SV44455(ALL)06/95] 5. Idle the vehicle in drive for 40 seconds.
*
[SV44460(ALL)07/95] 6. Continue to drive the vehicle in city traffic at speeds
between 25 and 40 mph (40-60 km/h) for 15 minutes.
During the 15 minute drive cycle the following modes must
be achieved:
*
[SV44465(ALL)07/95]
a. at least 5 stop and idle modes at 10 seconds each
*
[SV44470(ALL)07/95]
b. acceleration from idles at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle position, and
*
[SV44475(ALL)07/95]
c. choose 3 different speeds to do 1.5 minute steady state
throttle drives.
*
[SV44480(ALL)07/95] 7. Accelerate the vehicle up to between 45 and 60 mph
(70-100 km/h). This should take approximately 5 minutes.
*
[SV44485(ALL)07/95] 8. Drive vehicle and hold the throttle steady at the selected
speed between 45 and 60 mph (70-100 km/h) for
approximately 5 minutes.
*
[SV44490(ALL)07/95] 9. Drive the vehicle for 5 minutes at varying speeds between 45
and 60 mph (70-100 km/h).
*
[SV44492(ALL)07/95] 10. Bring the vehicle back to idle. Idle in Drive for 40 seconds.
*
[SV44494(ALL)07/95] 11. OBD II drive cycle has been completed. Vehicle can be
turned off when convenient.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
366
*
[SV44500(ALL)07/95] Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts, and
Lubricant Specifications
[SV44600(ALL)06/94]
twenty pica
chart:0040214-G
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
367
%
*
[SV44700(ALL)01/93] Motorcraft Parts
[SV44800(ALL)04/94]
eighteen pica
chart:0040215-G
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
368
%
*
[SV44900(ALL)01/93] Lubricant Specifications
[SV45000(ALL)05/96]
thirty pica
chart:0040216-J
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
369
%
*
[SV45100(ALL)01/95] Vehicle Storage
*
[SV45200(ALL)01/95]
Maintenance Tips
*
[SV45300(ALL)01/93]
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of
time (60 days or more), refer to the following maintenance
recommendations to keep your vehicle in good operating
condition.
*
[SV45400(ALL)01/95]
General
*
[SV45500(ALL)01/93]
■ Store your vehicle in a dry, ventilated place.
*
[SV45600(ALL)01/95]
■ Protect from sunlight, if possible.
*
[SV45700(ALL)01/93]
■ When your vehicle is stored outside, it will require regular
maintenance to protect against rust and damage.
*
[SV45800(ALL)01/95]
Body
*
[SV45900(ALL)01/93]
■ Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar
or mud from exterior surfaces, rear wheel housings and
underside of front fenders.
*
[SV46000(ALL)01/95]
■ Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent rust.
*
[SV46100(ALL)01/93]
■ Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of
auto wax to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when
your vehicle is washed.
*
[SV46200(ALL)04/95]
■ Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges and latches
with a light grade oil.
*
[SV46300(ALL)01/95]
■ Cover interior soft trim to prevent fading.
*
[SV46400(ALL)01/95]
■ Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
370
%
*
[SV46500(ALL)01/95]
Engine
*
[SV46600(ALL)01/93]
■ Start the engine every fifteen days. Run it at fast idle until it
reaches normal operating temperature.
*
[SV46700(ALL)01/93]
■ With your foot on the brake, shift the transaxle into all gears
while the engine is running.
%
*
[SV46800(ALL)01/95]
Fuel system
%
*
[SV47000(ALL)07/94]
■ Fill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fuel until the first
automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle.
*
[SV47100(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: During extended periods of vehicle storage (60 days or
more), fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation. This can
damage rubber and other polymers in the fuel system
and may also clog small orifices.
*
[SV47200(ALL)01/95]
Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added whenever actual or
expected storage periods exceed 60 days. Follow the instructions
on the label. The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed
to circulate the additive throughout the fuel system.
*
[SV47300(ALL)01/95]
A volatile corrosion inhibitor added to the fuel system will
protect the fuel system’s inner surfaces from corrosion. Follow
the instructions packaged with the product.
%
*
[SV47400(ALL)01/95]
Cooling system
*
[SV47500(ALL)01/93]
■ Protect your vehicle against freezing temperatures.
%
*
[SV47600(ALL)01/95]
Battery
*
[SV47700(ALL)01/93]
■ Check and recharge the battery as necessary.
*
[SV47800(ALL)01/95]
■ Keep connections clean and covered with a light coat of
grease.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Servicing Your Villager
371
%
*
[SV47900(ALL)01/95]
Brakes
*
[SV48000(ALL)01/93]
■ Make sure the brakes and parking brake are fully released.
%
*
[SV48100(ALL)01/95]
Tires
*
[SV48200(ALL)05/95]
■ Maintain recommended air pressure.
*
[SV48300(ALL)01/95]
Miscellaneous
*
[SV48400(ALL)01/93]
■ Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and clevis pins under
the vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust.
*
[SV48500(ALL)01/93]
■ Lubricate working parts to prevent corrosion.
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
372
*
[SV99950(ALL)05/95]
thirty-two pica
chart:MERCADVIL
File:15vxsvn.ex
Update:Wed Jun 5 12:25:18 1996
Quick Index
375
[QI00500(ALL)06/95]
full page art:0040311-A
File:16vxqin.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 13:39:37 1996
376
[QI00600(ALL)06/95]
full page art:0040363-A
Front Exterior View
File:16vxqin.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 13:39:37 1996
Quick Index
377
[QI00640(ALL)02/95]
full page art:0040360-A
Rear Exterior View
File:16vxqin.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 13:39:37 1996
378
[QI01000(ALL)02/95]
full page art:0040366-A
Entrance View
File:16vxqin.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 13:39:37 1996
Quick Index
379
[QI01200(ALL)02/95]
full page art:0040365-A
Driver’s Door
File:16vxqin.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 13:39:37 1996
380
[QI01400(ALL)06/95]
full page art:0040364-A
Instrument Panel
File:16vxqin.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 13:39:37 1996
Quick Index
381
[QI01600(ALL)06/95]
full page art:0040361-A
Instrument Cluster — Standard
File:16vxqin.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 13:39:37 1996
382
[QI01800(ALL)04/95]
full page art:0040362-A
Instrument Cluster — Electronic
File:16vxqin.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 13:39:37 1996
Quick Index
383
[QI02000(ALL)05/95]
full page art:0040368-A
Cargo Compartment
File:16vxqin.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 13:39:37 1996
384
[QI02200(ALL)05/95]
full page art:0040367-A
Engine Compartment
File:16vxqin.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 13:39:37 1996
Index
385
A
ABS warning light (see Anti-lock brake system) ......70
Accessory position on the ignition............. 57
Additives, engine oil.................. 310
Air bag supplemental restraint system
and child safety seats ............... 25,32
description .................... 23,26
driver air bag................... 23,26
indicator light.....................71
operation ....................... 26
passenger air bag ...................26
proper seating ....................24
service and information labels .............26
tone generator ....................30
wearing safety belts ..................24
Air cleaner filter, location ............... 300
Antenna, radio (see Electronic sound system). . . 121, 205, 226
Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) ............. 314
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
description ..................... 234
noise........................ 235
see also Brake.................... 234
warning light ..................... 70
Anti-theft lug nuts and key............... 267
Appeals (see Dispute settlement board) ......... 278
Assistance (see Customer assistance)........... 275
Audio system (see Electronic sound system) ....... 205
File:vxixn.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 09:28:47 1996
386
Automatic transaxle
driving with .................... 229
fluid, adding .................. 331, 333
fluid, checking ................... 331
fluid, specification.................. 368
B
Backing up ...................... 230
Battery
acid, treating emergencies ............ 255, 330
charging system warning light ............. 73
disconnecting.................... 259
how to service ................... 329
proper disposal, recycling .............. 330
servicing ...................... 329
voltage gauge .................... 73
when storing your vehicle .............. 370
Brake fluid
brake warning light .................. 69
checking and adding ................ 333
description ..................... 333
specifications .................. 334, 368
Brakes
adjustment ..................... 234
anti-lock ...................... 234
anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light ....... 70
applying the brakes ................. 237
brake warning light .................. 69
fluid, checking and adding.............. 333
fluid, refill capacities ................ 333
fluid, specifications ............... 334, 368
front disc...................... 234
if brakes do not grip well .............. 236
lubricant specifications................ 368
File:vxixn.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 09:28:47 1996
387
Index
Brakes (continued)
new brake linings ................... 5
noise...................... 234, 236
parking ...................... 237
power braking ................... 234
servicing .................... 236, 333
stopping distances.................. 236
trailer ....................... 251
when storing your vehicle .............. 371
Brights (high beams) .................77,124
Bulbs, replacing
halogen ...................... 349
headlamps ..................... 349
specifications .................... 355
C
Canada, customer assistance .............. 282
Carbon monoxide in exhaust ............... 64
Cargo net ....................... 171
Car seats for children (see Child safety seats) .......32
Catalytic converter................... 362
Chains, tires...................... 328
Changing a tire .................... 259
Charging system warning light ..............73
Childproof locks.................... 139
Child safety restraints ..................31
child safety belts ................... 44
child safety seats ...................32
Child safety seats
and air bags ................... 25,32
attaching with tether straps ..............39
automatic locking mode (retractor) ......... 16,32
in front seat ................... 25,32
in rear outboard seat .................32
in rear seat ...................... 32
tether anchorage hardware ...............39
File:vxixn.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 09:28:47 1996
388
Chime
headlamps on .................... 77
key in ignition .................... 58
safety belt ...................... 70
Circuit breakers
checking and replacing ............... 346
see also fuses .................... 337
Cleaning your vehicle
chrome and aluminum parts .............. 7
engine compartment................. 302
exterior ....................... 6
exterior lamps ................... 114
fabric ....................... 165
headlamps ..................... 114
instrument panel ................... 7
plastic parts ..................... 7
polishing ....................... 6
rustproofing ..................... 7
safety belts ...................... 23
tail lamps ..................... 114
upholstery and interior trim ............. 165
washing ....................... 6
waxing........................ 6
wheels ....................... 329
Climate control system
air conditioning.................... 91
heating........................ 91
Clock......................... 217
Clutch, fluid reservoir ................. 333
Cold engine starting ................... 60
Combination lap and shoulder belts...........9,11
Controls
instrument panel ................... 89
mirrors....................... 169
steering column................... 123
File:vxixn.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 09:28:47 1996
389
Index
Coolant (see Engine coolant)
checking and adding ................ 314
drain and flush ................... 318
preparing for storage ................ 370
specifications .................... 368
temperature gauge ................ 78,82
warnings ...................... 314
Cooling fan ...................... 296
Cruise control (see Speed control) ............ 128
Customer Assistance Centre, Ford of Canada....... 282
D
Dashboard (see Instrument panel) .............89
Daytime running light system ............. 114
Defrost, windshield ................... 91
Dipstick
automatic transaxle fluid............... 331
engine oil ..................... 311
power steering fluid ................. 335
Disabled vehicle (see Towing).............. 273
Dispute Settlement Board................ 278
Doors
door ajar warning light ................ 74
lubricant specifications................ 368
Driving under special conditions
bad weather .................... 240
heavy load ..................... 241
high speed ..................... 240
high water ..................... 241
slippery roads ................... 240
tips for safe driving ................. 239
towing a trailer ................... 242
File:vxixn.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 09:28:47 1996
390
E
Electrical system
circuit breakers ................... 346
fuses...................... 337–338
relays ....................... 347
Electronic sound system
antenna ...................... 121
radio reception ................... 226
tuning the radio .................. 210
warranty and service information........... 228
Emergencies, roadside
assistance ..................... 275
battery acid spills ................ 255, 331
fuel ........................ 307
towing ....................... 273
Emergency brake (parking brake) ............ 237
Emission control system
catalytic converter.................. 362
emissions warranty ................. 362
Engine
check engine warning light .............. 72
does not start................... 61,63
fuel injected engine, starting .............. 59
fuel pump shut-off switch ............... 63
preparing to start ................... 59
service points.................... 300
starting ....................... 60
starting after a collision ............... 273
storing your vehicle ................. 369
Engine block heater ................... 62
Engine coolant .................... 314
checking and adding ................ 314
disposal ...................... 296
drain and flush ................... 318
File:vxixn.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 09:28:47 1996
391
Index
Engine coolant (continued)
preparing for storage ................ 370
proper solution ................... 333
recovery reservoir ................ 300, 314
specifications .................... 368
temperature gauge ................ 78,82
Engine coolant temperature gauge
description .................... 78,82
mechanical .................... 78,82
Engine coolant temperature guage:electronic ...... 78,82
Engine fan ...................... 296
Engine:idle speed control................. 62
Engine oil
changing oil and oil filter ............ 311, 313
checking and adding ................ 311
dipstick ...................... 311
disposal .................... 296, 333
engine oil pressure warning light ............ 73
filter, specifications ................. 367
specifications .................... 310
synthetic oil .................... 310
“break-in” oils .................... 5
viscosity ...................... 310
Entry system, illuminated ............... 120
Exhaust fumes......................64
F
Fan, engine fan, avoiding injury............. 296
Federal Communications Commission .......... 228
Flashers, hazard .................... 112
Flashing the lamps................... 124
Flat tire........................ 259
Ford Dispute Settlement Board ............. 278
Ford Motor Company of Canada ............ 282
File:vxixn.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 09:28:47 1996
392
Ford of Canada Customer Assistance Centre ....... 282
Foreign registration .................. 284
French owner guides, how to obtain ........... 3
Fuel
calculating fuel economy............... 308
choosing the right fuel ............... 305
filling your vehicle with fuel ............. 303
filter, specifications ................. 367
fuel filler door release lever ........... 303, 367
fuel gauge .................... 77,83
low fuel warning light................. 76
octane rating .................... 305
quality ....................... 305
running out of fuel ................. 308
safety information relating to automotive fuels..... 307
storing your vehicle ................. 370
treating emergencies................. 307
Fuel cap
removing...................... 303
replacing ...................... 303
Fuel filler door .................... 303
remote release ................... 303
Fuel filter, specifications ................ 367
Fuel gauge ..................... 77,83
Fuel pump shut-off switch
engine does not start ................ 273
starting after a collision ............... 273
Fuse panels
engine compartment................. 344
instrument panel .................. 338
Fuses
charts ....................... 338
checking and replacing ............... 337
circuit breakers ................... 346
File:vxixn.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 09:28:47 1996
393
Index
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ................. 303
Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) .......... 305, 308
Gasoline (see Fuel)................... 303
Gauges, Electronic
engine coolant temperature gauge ......... 78,82
fuel gauge .................... 77,83
odometer ....................... 79
speedometer .....................79
Gauges, Mechanical
engine coolant temperature gauge ......... 78,82
fuel gauge .................... 77,83
odometer ....................... 79
speedometer .....................79
tachometer ...................... 80
trip odometer ..................... 80
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
calculating ..................... 247
definition.................... 241, 245
driving with a heavy load .............. 241
Gearshift
automatic operation ................. 229
column-mounted .................. 229
locking the gearshift.................. 57
positions ...................... 229
shifting the gears .................. 229
Gearshift:shifting the gears ............... 229
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
calculating ..................... 247
definition.................... 241, 245
driving with a heavy load .............. 241
File:vxixn.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 09:28:47 1996
394
H
Hazard flashers .................... 112
Headlamps
aiming ....................... 348
bulb specification .................. 355
checking alignment ................. 348
cleaning ...................... 114
daytime running lights ............... 114
high beam ..................... 124
replacing bulbs ................... 348
warning chime .................... 77
Head restraints .................... 159
Heating, manual heating and air conditioning system.... 91
High beams
indicator light .................... 77
operation...................... 124
Hitch......................... 250
Hood
latch location .................... 298
lubrication specifications ............... 368
release lever .................... 298
working under the hood............... 296
I
Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) ........ 277, 283
Idle
relearning ................... 259, 296
speed ........................ 62
Ignition
chime ........................ 58
positions of the ignition ................ 57
removing the key ................... 58
Infant seats (see Safety seats) ............... 31
Instrument cluster .................... 67
electronic....................... 81
File:vxixn.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 09:28:47 1996
395
Index
Instrument panel
lighting up panel and interior ............ 115
location of components ................89
Interval wipers .................... 125
J
Jack, operation .................... 263
Jump-starting your vehicle
attaching cables ................... 257
disconnecting cables ................. 259
K
Keyless entry system
locking and unlocking doors ............. 144
programming entry code............... 143
Keys
key in ignition chime .................58
positions of the ignition ................ 57
removing from the ignition .............. 58
stuck in lock position ................. 57
L
Lamps
bulb replacement specifications chart ......... 355
checking ...................... 348
daytime running light system ............ 114
hazard flashers ................... 112
high beams ..................... 124
illuminated entry system............... 120
instrument panel, dimming.............. 115
replacing bulbs ................... 348
trailer ....................... 251
Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) ......... 123
Liftgate ........................ 152
File:vxixn.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 09:28:47 1996
396
Lights, warning and indicator
airbag........................ 71
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ................. 70
brake ........................ 69
charging system ................... 73
check engine ..................... 72
door ajar ....................... 74
engine oil pressure .................. 73
hazard warning light ................ 112
high beam ...................... 77
low fuel ....................... 76
oil pressure...................... 73
rear ABS ....................... 70
safety belt ...................... 70
turn signal indicator................. 123
Load limits
GAWR....................... 241
GVWR ....................... 241
trailer towing.................... 249
Lubricant specifications ................ 368
Luggage rack ..................... 173
Lug nuts
anti-theft ...................... 267
tightening sequence ................. 271
M
Maintenance (see Servicing) .............. 295
Map pockets ..................... 166
Master cylinder, brakes ................ 333
Mileage, calculating fuel economy............ 308
Mirrors
automatic dimming rearview mirror ......... 139
dual electric remote control ............. 170
rearview ...................... 169
side view mirrors (manual) ............. 170
side view mirrors (power) .............. 170
Motorcraft parts.................... 367
File:vxixn.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 09:28:47 1996
397
Index
O
Octane rating ..................... 305
Odometer
description ...................... 79
trip odometer ..................... 80
Oil filter ....................... 313
Oil (see Engine oil) .................. 310
Oil viscosity...................... 310
On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system .......... 364
Overdrive....................... 231
Overseas offices .................... 284
P
Parking brake
operation ...................... 237
warning light ..................... 69
Parts (see Motorcraft Parts) ............... 367
PCV valve, specifications ................ 367
Power door locks ................... 140
Power features
door locks ..................... 140
mirrors....................... 169
windows ...................... 155
Power steering
dipstick ...................... 335
driving with power steering ............. 234
fluid, checking and adding.............. 335
fluid, specifications ................. 368
servicing ...................... 234
Prop rod, hood .................... 298
File:vxixn.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 09:28:47 1996
398
R
Radio (see Electronic sound systems) .......... 205
Rear window ..................... 155
washer reservoir .................. 319
Relays ........................ 347
Remote entry system, illuminated entry ......... 120
Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints)
adult......................... 9
child......................... 31
head ........................ 159
infant ........................ 31
Roadside assistance .................. 275
Roadside emergencies ................. 255
Roof rack....................... 173
Rotating the tires ................... 323
S
Safe driving tips.................... 239
Safety belts (see Safety restraints) ............. 9
Safety Compliance Certification Label .......... 247
Safety information relating to automotive fuels...... 307
Safety restraints
adjusting the safety belts ............. 11,17
automatic locking mode ................ 16
automatic locking mode (retractor) ........... 16
cleaning the safety belts ................ 23
extension assembly .................. 22
for adults ...................... 9
for children...................... 31
for infants ...................... 31
for pregnant women ................. 9
head ........................ 159
lap and shoulder belts................9,11
File:vxixn.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 09:28:47 1996
399
Index
Safety restraints (continued)
maintenance .....................23
proper use ...................... 9
replacement......................23
warning light and chime................ 70
Safety seats for children .................32
and air bags ................... 25,32
attaching with tether straps .............. 39
automatic locking mode (retractor) ......... 16,32
in front seat ..................... 32
in rear outboard ................... 32
in rear seat ...................... 32
tether anchorage hardware ...............39
Seat belts (see Safety restraints) .............. 9
Seats
child safety seats ...................32
cleaning upholstery ................. 165
head restraints ................... 159
Serial number (VIN) .................. 283
Service concerns .................... 276
Servicing your vehicle
precautions when servicing.............. 296
servicing when you tow ............... 273
Shift positions (see Gearshift) .............. 229
Shoulder and lap belts (see Safety restraints) .......9,11
Shoulder belts (see Safety restraints).......... 11,17
Side mirrors, adjusting ................. 170
Snow tires and chains ................. 328
Spare tire
changing the tire ................ 259, 263
conventional spare ................. 259
finding the spare .................. 261
removing the spare tire ............... 261
temporary spare................... 260
File:vxixn.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 09:28:47 1996
400
Spark plugs, specifications ............... 367
Special driving conditions ............... 239
Specification chart, lubricants .............. 368
Speed control
accelerating..................... 131
canceling a set speed ................ 132
resetting ...................... 132
resuming a set speed ................ 132
tap up/tap down .................. 132
when towing a trailer ................ 252
Speedometer ...................... 79
Starting your vehicle
preparing to start your vehicle ............. 59
starting a cold engine ................. 60
starting after a collision ............... 273
Steering, power .................... 234
Steering wheel
locking........................ 57
speed controls ................... 128
Storage compartments
cargo net...................... 171
map pockets .................... 166
Storing your vehicle .................. 369
Supplemental air bag readiness light ........... 71
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........... 23
T
Tachometer ....................... 80
mechanical cluster................... 80
Tail lamps
bulb replacement ................ 348, 355
cleaning ...................... 114
Temperature control (see Climate control) ......... 91
Tether anchor installation (see Child restraints)....... 39
Tires
changing ...................... 259
checking the pressure ................ 322
cleaning ...................... 329
File:vxixn.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 09:28:47 1996
401
Index
Tires (continued)
inspection and maintenance ............. 322
replacing ...................... 324
rotating ...................... 323
snow tires and chains ................ 328
spare tire ...................... 261
storing your vehicle ................. 371
tire grades ................... 324, 326
treadwear ................... 324, 326
wear bands ..................... 324
wheel and tire matching ............... 325
Towing a trailer (see Trailer towing) .......... 242
Towing your vehicle
with a tow truck .................. 273
Trailer Towing .................... 242
Trailer towing
tips ........................ 252
trailer brakes .................... 251
trailer lamps .................... 251
Transaxle
automatic operation ................. 229
fluid, checking and adding (automatic) ........ 331
lubricant specifications................ 368
Transaxle control switch ................ 231
Trip odometer...................... 80
Turn signal
indicator lights ................... 123
lever ........................ 123
File:vxixn.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 09:28:47 1996
402
U
Used engine oil, disposal.............. 296, 333
V
Variable interval wipers ................ 125
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........ 277, 283
Vehicle loading, calculating the load .......... 247
Vehicle storage .................... 369
Ventilating your vehicle (see Climate control) ....... 91
Viscosity (see Engine oil)................ 310
Voltmeter (see Battery voltage gauge) ........... 73
W
Warning chimes
headlamps on .................... 77
key in ignition .................... 58
safety belt ...................... 70
Warning lights (see Lights) ................ 67
Warranties, radio ................... 228
Warranty Information Booklet .............. 4
Washer fluid
rear window reservoir................ 319
reservoir ...................... 319
windshield ..................... 319
Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) ............. 241
Wheel and tire matching ................ 325
Wheel bearings lubricant specifications ......... 368
Wheel dollies (see Towing)............... 273
Wheels ........................ 325
anti-theft lugnuts .................. 267
cleaning ...................... 329
inspection and maintenance ............. 322
lug nuts ...................... 263
replacement .................... 325
File:vxixn.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 09:28:47 1996
403
Index
Windows
power windows, operating .............. 155
Windshield, washing.................. 125
Windshield washer fluid and wipers
checking and adding fluid .............. 319
checking and replacing wiper blades ......... 320
liftgate reservoir................... 319
operation ...................... 125
reservoir ...................... 319
specifications .................... 320
variable interval wipers ............... 125
Windshield wipers and washer ............. 125
Wrecker towing .................... 273
File:vxixn.ex
Update:Fri Jun 7 09:28:47 1996
404
Service Station Information
[GS00200(ALL)06/95]
twenty-eight pica
chart:0040260-F
File:17vxgsn.ex
Update:Mon Jun 3 08:37:27 1996
